FCC ID: B94HSTNH-F13C HP iPAQ Smart Phone

 

453858-401.fm Page 1 Friday, April 27, 2007 4:21 PM ANTENNA LOCATION The Wireless LAN antenna is located in the bottom front side of the HP iPAQ. The GSM antenna is located in the top back of the HP iPAQ. LOCALIZACIN DE LA ANTENA La antena de LAN inalmbrica est localizada en la parte inferior frontal de su HP iPAQ. La antena GSM est localizada en la parte superior trasera de su HP iPAQ. EMPLACEMENT DE LANTENNE Lantenne de rseau local sans fil est situe, lavant, dans la partie infrieure du HP iPAQ. Lantenne GSM est situe larrire, dans la partie suprieure de lappareil. 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. First Edition April 2007 Printed in China 453858-401

 

 

Additional Product Information services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-

Packard Development Company, L.P. First Edition April 2007 Document Part Number: 446232001 Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft, Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP iPAQ Products are Powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 for Smartphone. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-

Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This product's real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and Table of contents 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ ......................................................................................... 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents ............................................................................................................. 2 3 Components Front Panel Components ........................................................................................... 4 Bottom Panel Components ........................................................................................ 5 Left and Right Side Components ............................................................................... 6 Back Panel Components ........................................................................................... 8 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card ....................................... 9 Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover ......................................... 11 Step 3: Charge the battery ....................................................................................... 12 Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ ................................................................................. 13 Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password ............................................................. 13 Finding the Serial Number and Model Number ....................................................... 13 Status Icons ............................................................................................................. 14 5 Learning the Basics Home Screen ........................................................................................................... 18 Battery Saving Tips .................................................................................................. 18 Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ ..................................................................... 19 Entering Text ........................................................................................................... 19 Changing Input Modes ..................................................................................... 19 Entering Text in the Multipress Mode .............................................................. 20 Entering Text in the T9 Mode .......................................................................... 21 Entering the Owner Information ............................................................................... 21 Viewing the Operating System Information ............................................................. 22 Changing the Regional Settings .............................................................................. 22 Adjusting the Volume ............................................................................................... 23 Adjusting Ringer Volume ................................................................................. 23 Adjusting Speaker Volume .............................................................................. 23 Changing the Power Management Settings ............................................................ 23 iii Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight ............................................. 23 Installing and Removing Programs .......................................................................... 24 Opening and Closing Programs ............................................................................... 24 Customizing the HP iPAQ ........................................................................................ 25 Setting Alarms ......................................................................................................... 25 Creating and Assigning a Category ......................................................................... 26 Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 26 Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection ........................................................ 28 Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues ................................................... 28 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key ................................................................................................ 32 Using the Back key .................................................................................................. 32 Using the 4-Way Navigation Key ............................................................................. 32 Calling Features ....................................................................................................... 32 Subscribing to a Mobile Phone Service Provider ............................................. 32 Making a Call ................................................................................................... 33 Answering a Call .............................................................................................. 34 Using Call Waiting ........................................................................................... 34 Redialing a Number ......................................................................................... 34 Calling a Contact ............................................................................................. 34 Making a Call Using Voice Dialing ................................................................... 36 Making Emergency Calls ................................................................................. 36 Making Calls Using Speed Dials ...................................................................... 36 Using voice mail ............................................................................................... 37 Using the Handsfree Function ......................................................................... 37 Monitoring Phone Use ..................................................................................... 37 Making Data Calls ............................................................................................ 37 Muting a Call .................................................................................................... 38 Putting a Call on Hold ...................................................................................... 38 Making a Conference Call ............................................................................... 38 Making a Call From a Hyperlink Phone Number ............................................. 39 Dialing International Numbers ......................................................................... 39 Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength ..................................................... 39 Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number .................................................. 40 Using Call History .................................................................................................... 40 Managing Calls Using Call History .................................................................. 40 Wireless Manager .................................................................................................... 40 Using Wireless Manager .................................................................................. 40 Flight Mode ...................................................................................................... 41 Quick Launch ........................................................................................................... 42 iv Changing Phone Settings ........................................................................................ 42 Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type ......................................................... 42 Changing Service Settings ...................................................................................... 42 Changing Phone Service Settings ................................................................... 42 Changing Network Settings ..................................................................................... 44 Profiles ..................................................................................................................... 44 Using profiles ................................................................................................... 44 Editing profiles ................................................................................................. 45 Automatic Frequency Band Selection ...................................................................... 45 Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device ............................................................ 46 ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and e-mail with Exchange/Outlook ................................................................................................... 46 Setting up E-mail ..................................................................................................... 46 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server ............................................................... 48 Voice Notes ............................................................................................................. 48 7 Connections Connecting to Intranet URLs ................................................................................... 49 Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL ..................................................................... 49 Setting Up Proxy Settings ........................................................................................ 49 Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect ...................................................... 50 Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings ..................................................................... 51 Setting Up a VPN Connection ................................................................................. 51 Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................ 51 Wi-Fi Terms ..................................................................................................... 52 Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .................................................. 53 Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network ......................................................... 53 Finding an IP Address ..................................................................................... 54 Deleting a Wireless Network Connection ........................................................ 54 Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings ..................................................... 54 Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant ............................................... 55 Bluetooth .................................................................................................................. 56 Bluetooth Terms .............................................................................................. 56 Changing Bluetooth Settings ........................................................................... 57 Connecting To Bluetooth Headset ................................................................... 57 Bluetooth Device Profiles ................................................................................. 57 Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership ............................... 58 Making a Device Discoverable ........................................................................ 59 Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port ............................................... 59 Ending a Connection ....................................................................................... 60 GPRS/EDGE ........................................................................................................... 60 v Changing GPRS Network Settings .................................................................. 60 Editing Network Parameters ............................................................................ 61 Connecting to a Laptop ............................................................................................ 61 To Connect to a laptop using a USB data connection ..................................... 61 To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection ............................... 62 ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth .................................................. 63 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera ......................................................................................... 65 To Capture Photos ........................................................................................... 65 To View Photos ................................................................................................ 65 Changing Camera Settings ...................................................................................... 66 Changing Brightness Settings ......................................................................... 66 Changing Resolution Settings ......................................................................... 66 Changing Mode Settings ................................................................................. 66 Changing Zoom Settings ................................................................................. 66 Changing White Balance Settings ................................................................... 67 Configuring File settings .................................................................................. 67 Using the Camcorder ............................................................................................... 69 Recording Videos ............................................................................................ 69 Configuring Video Format ................................................................................ 69 Transfer Images ....................................................................................................... 69 Using GPRS .................................................................................................... 69 Using Bluetooth ............................................................................................... 70 9 Messaging Understanding Messages ........................................................................................ 71 Using Folders ........................................................................................................... 72 Synchronizing E-Mail ............................................................................................... 73 Replying to E-mail using HP Voice Reply ................................................................ 73 Composing E-mail using Voice Commander ........................................................... 74 Setting up Messaging Accounts .............................................................................. 74 Text Messaging ............................................................................................... 74 MMS Messaging .............................................................................................. 75 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server ....................................................... 75 Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account ............................................ 75 Receiving E-mail Attachments ......................................................................... 75 Receiving Meeting Requests ........................................................................... 76 Creating or Changing a Signature ................................................................... 77 Using Messaging ..................................................................................................... 78 vi Composing and Sending Messages ................................................................ 78 Replying to or Forwarding a Message ............................................................. 78 Adding an Attachment to a Message ............................................................... 79 Downloading Messages ................................................................................... 79 Downloading Messages from a Server ............................................................ 79 MSN Messenger ...................................................................................................... 80 Signing In and Out of Messenger .................................................................... 80 Sending Instant Messages .............................................................................. 81 Changing Your Status ...................................................................................... 81 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments ............................................................................... 82 Creating an Appointment ......................................................................................... 82 Updating an Appointment ........................................................................................ 82 Canceling an Appointment ....................................................................................... 82 Changing the Display of the Work Week ................................................................. 83 11 Contacts Adding a Contact ..................................................................................................... 84 Deleting a Contact ................................................................................................... 84 Changing Contact Information ................................................................................. 84 Copying a Contact ................................................................................................... 84 Adding a Photo ........................................................................................................ 85 Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact ............................................................... 85 Sending a Text Message to a Contact ..................................................................... 86 Adding and Removing a Picture .............................................................................. 86 Working with the Contact List .................................................................................. 87 12 Applications Using HP Applications ............................................................................................. 88 HP Voice Reply ................................................................................................ 88 HP iPAQ Setup Assistant ................................................................................ 88 Voice Commands ............................................................................................ 90 HP iPAQ Shortcuts .......................................................................................... 91 Task Manager .................................................................................................. 92 HP iPAQ DataConnect .................................................................................... 92 HP iPAQ Tips ................................................................................................... 92 HP QuickStart Tour .......................................................................................... 93 Using Windows Media MP3 Player .......................................................................... 93 Using Voice Recorder .............................................................................................. 95 vii Using MS Office Applications .................................................................................. 95 File Management ..................................................................................................... 96 Working With Folders ...................................................................................... 96 Playing Games ........................................................................................................ 96 Playing Bubble Breaker ................................................................................... 96 Playing Solitaire ............................................................................................... 97 Internet Explorer ...................................................................................................... 98 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards ............................................................................................... 99 Inserting a Storage Card .......................................................................................... 99 Removing a Storage Card ..................................................................................... 100 Viewing Content of a Storage Card ....................................................................... 100 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files .............................................................................. 101 Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 ................... 101 Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips .......................................................... 102 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task ........................................................... 104 Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List ...................................................... 104 Marking a Task as Completed ............................................................................... 104 16 Product Specifications System Specifications ............................................................................................ 105 Physical Specifications .......................................................................................... 106 Operating Environment .......................................................................................... 106 Regulatory Marks ................................................................................................... 107 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice ....................................................... 108 Modifications .................................................................................................. 108 Cables ............................................................................................................ 108 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) ...................................................................................... 109 Canadian Notice .................................................................................................... 109 Avis Canadien ........................................................................................................ 109 European Union Notice .......................................................................................... 110 viii Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices .............................................. 112 Battery Warning ..................................................................................................... 112 Battery Recycling ................................................................................................... 113 Battery Disposal ..................................................................................................... 113 Equipment Warning ............................................................................................... 114 Airline Travel Notice ............................................................................................... 114 Medical Electronic Equipment ............................................................................... 114 SAR Notice ............................................................................................................ 114 Wireless Notices .................................................................................................... 115 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice ................................................................... 116 Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice ........................................................... 116 Brazilian Notice .............................................................................................. 116 Singaporean Wireless Notice ........................................................................ 116 Japanese Notice .................................................................................................... 117 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices ..................................................................... 118 Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices ..................................................................... 118 Bluetooth Devices .......................................................................................... 118 Taiwan DGT Notice ............................................................................................... 119 Korean Notice ........................................................................................................ 119 Acoustics Warning ................................................................................................. 119 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? ........................... 120 I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this? ........................................ 120 I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do? ................................ 121 I am unable to hear voices clearly. How to resolve this? ....................................... 121 I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do? ........................................... 121 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call? ........................................... 121 Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times? ............................................. 121 Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times? .................................................. 122 Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen? .................................................................................................................. 122 I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do? ......................................... 122 I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do? ............................. 122 19 Care and Maintenance Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ ........................................................................ 123 Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ ................................................................... 123 Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ ................................................... 123 Guidelines for using accessories ........................................................................... 123 ix Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places .............................................. 124 x Q A P i e h t g n i r e t s g e R i 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Manage you profile and register your products Sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters After registering your HP iPAQ, you will receive an e-mail message regarding special offers and promotions. Take time now to register your HP iPAQ online at http://www.register.hp.com. If your mail or e-mail address needs to be updated after registration, visit http://www.register.hp.com and enter your user ID and registration password to edit your online profile at http://www.register.hp.com. Registering your HP iPAQ 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. Use this illustration to become more familiar with your new device. NOTE: Box contents vary by model. Box Contents

(1) HP iPAQ 2 Chapter 2 Box Contents Box Contents

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) 1100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with special software HP iPAQ documentation Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Plantronics, part number 430219, that is included with your HP iPAQ.

(6) AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with more than one interchangeable plug, which may not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your region.

(7) Mini-USB synchronization cable s t n e t n o C x o B Box Contents 3 3 Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all regions. Front Panel Components Component Function

(1) Display screen Use to view the contents on the screen. 4 Chapter 3 Components Component Function

(2) Right Softkey

(3) Power Button or End Key Press to launch Shortcuts from the Home screen. Press to end a phone call. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off.

(4) Back Key Press to go back to the previous screen.

(5) Keypad Use keys on the keypad to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus.

(6) 4Way Navigation Key Use to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Scroll up, down, left, or right by pressing down on the button in the direction you want to scroll. Release the button to stop the scrolling action.

(7) Home Key Press to go to the Home screen.

(8) Send Key Press to answer a call, lock your HP iPAQ, or start the speaker phone.

(9) Action Button Press to open an item or a program. Left Softkey Press to access programs from the Start menu. Earpiece Use to listen to phone calls, sounds, and notifications.

(1 0)

(1 1) Bottom Panel Components s t n e n o p m o C Bottom Panel Components 5 Component Function Charging/

Communications Port Use to connect to mini-USB synchronization cable. Microphone Use for phone conversations or to record notes. Strap Loop Use to carry your HP iPAQ.

(1

)

(2

)

(3

) Left and Right Side Components 6 Chapter 3 Components Component Function

(1) Volume key Press to increase or decrease the earpiece volume.

(2) Micro SD Slot Insert a Micro Secure Digital (SD) storage card with label side down for data storage.

(3) Headset Connector Plug the headphones into this connector for a private phone conversation or to listen to music. Make sure that the wired headset is firmly plugged into the headset connector.

(4) Voice Commander Button Press to launch the voice commander capability. s t n e n o p m o C Left and Right Side Components 7 Back Panel Components Component Function

(1

)

(2

)

(3

) Speaker Use the speakers to listen to music or as a speakerphone to converse when driving or otherwise occupied. Battery Cover Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or SIM card. HP Digital Camera Lens With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view the photo object on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. 8 Chapter 3 Components Setting Up Your HP iPAQ 4 Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 1. Slide the battery cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 9 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i 2. Remove the battery. If the battery is already installed, remove it before NOTE:

inserting the SIM card. The SIM card is provided by a mobile phone service provider. 3. Place the SIM card in the provided slot. NOTE: Be sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. 4. Slide the SIM card into the slot. 10 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 1. 2. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment and insert the battery. Slide the battery cover until it clicks into place. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 11 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i Step 3: Charge the battery CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, be sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Your HP iPAQ comes with a mini-USB synchronization cable, which must be used to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges may take longer. 1. Insert the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the mini-USB synchronization cable to the charging/

communications port on your HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 12 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press End key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not switch on, attach an AC adapter to switch on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press the Power Button/End Key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the keypad to enter information. Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password You can keep your data more secure by requiring a password every time you turn on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Security > Device Lock. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, and select the amount of time from the list box that your HP iPAQ must be unused before the password is required. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use. Enter the password and confirm the password. Press Done. 4. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified amount of time, you will be prompted to enter your password. 3. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. Finding the Serial Number and Model Number Locate the Serial and Model numbers before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for in-warranty support. View the Serial Number and Model ID by pressing Start > More > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ 13 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i You can also find this information underneath the battery of your HP iPAQ. 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. Locate the label containing the Product ID and Serial Number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. Icon Status Missed call New voice mail New voice mail on line 1 New voice mail on line 2 New voice mail on line 1 and line 2 New e-mail or SMS Instant message received 14 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Icon Status Wi-Fi on Bluetooth SIM card fault Sync error Call forwarding active Roaming GPRS available Status Icons 15 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i Icon Status Phone line 1 Phone line 2 Ringer off Speakerphone on Battery level Battery level low Battery charging No battery or battery fault Signal strength 16 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Icon Status Voice call active Data call active GPRS in use Radio off Phone connection unavailable or network error Call on hold No SIM card installed Status Icons 17 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i 5 Learning the Basics This chapter will help you get started with your HP iPAQ. You can learn basic functions such as entering text, knowing the Home screen, synchronization, and troubleshooting. Home Screen The Home screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. Along the top of the Home screen are the connectivity icons, the volume indicator, and the clock. The top of the Home screen displays the icons of the last ten programs you browsed. Use the Home screen to do the following:

Access all applications and settings by selecting the Start icon. Access your shortcuts by selecting Shortcuts. Battery Saving Tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life. Sounds - Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Press Start > Settings > Sounds and turn off any notifications that are unnecessary. Auto Turn Off the Backlight - Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Specify a short amount of time to wait before turning off the backlight. Set Backlight time out on battery to 5 to 10 seconds and Display time out to 30 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi - Always turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when you are not using them. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the mini-

USB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. 18 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i To check the battery power:

Press Start > Settings > Power Management. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ You can lock your HP iPAQ to prevent accidental key presses and unintentional phone calls while you carry your HP iPAQ. NOTE: When your device is locked, you can still receive phone call notifications and see appointment reminders. Press and hold the Send key. To lock your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Unlock appears in the Left Softkey position. To unlock your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Your HP iPAQ is unlocked and ready for use. Press the Left Softkey. Press iPAQ. Entering Text You can enter text and numbers on the HP iPAQ using the keypad. The HP iPAQ supports two input modes for entering text: Multipress and T9. The status indicator on the top of the display shows the input mode you are currently using. Changing Input Modes You can change the text mode to T9 or Multipress mode as follows:

1. Press and hold * until the status indicator for the input mode you want is shown at the top of the display screen. To change options in the Multipress or the T9 modes, for example, changes from abc to ABC, or from T9 to t9, press * and release. The following table shows the list of input mode status indicators. 2. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ 19 Indicator Mode abc Abc ABC t9 T9 T9 The Multipress text input mode, lowercase The Multipress text input mode, initial capital letters The Multipress text input mode, uppercase The T9 text input mode, lowercase The T9 text input mode, initial capital letters The T9 text input mode, uppercase TIP:

of a sentence is always capital. Entering Text in the Multipress Mode In the Multipress or the T9 text input mode, the first letter You can enter a letter in the Multipress mode by pressing the number key on which the letter appears. To enter the first letter on the number key, press the key once. To enter the second letter, press the key twice, and so on. The letter entered remains underlined until you complete the multiple keypress and the cursor moves to the next position. When you enter letters that are on the same number key, wait until the underline disappears before entering the next letter. This pause is called the Multipress time out, and you can adjust the length of the pause between multiple keypress. To change the Multipress time out:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Accessibility. Scroll to select the time for entering text in the multipress mode in Multipress time out box. Press Done. 3. 20 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Entering Text in the T9 Mode T9 is a predictive text entry mode that lets you enter a word using single keypress per letter. Entering Common Words To enter common words embedded in the T9 software:

1. Press a key indicating the first letter of the word you want to enter. A list of alternative words and letter combinations will be displayed on the screen. If the word you want is not displayed, continue by entering the second letter. The word choices update with each keypress. 2. Entering Novel Words i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i To enter the first letter of a word, press the required key once. You can coin words that are not recognized by T9. 1. 2. Use keypad to enter the rest of the word. 3. If the word you want to type is not present in the dictionary, press ADD WORD?. Enter the word in the Add My Word box and press Done. 4. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ stores the unrecognized word and includes it in the list of alternative word choices. When memory space for unrecognized words is filled, your HP iPAQ deletes the oldest words as it adds new words. TIP: You can also enter numbers and symbols in messages. Entering the Owner Information Enter your information so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Owner Information. Enter your personal information and press Done. Entering the Owner Information 21 Viewing the Operating System Information Press Start > Settings > More... > About. The operating system version is displayed at the top of the screen. TIP: You can also press Start > More > Accessories > Resource Manager to view System Information. Changing the Regional Settings The style in which language, locale, numbers, currency, dates, and times are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Regional Settings. Select your region. The region you select determines the available options. To customize additional settings, select the appropriate options. Press Done. 3. 4. To change the language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display, follow steps 1 through 4 above, and then perform one of the following:

On the Language option, select the language display options. On the Locale option, select the locale display options. On the Date option, select the date display options. On the Time option, select the time display options. On the Number option, select the number display options. On the Currency option, select the currency display options. 22 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Adjusting the Volume Adjusting Ringer Volume You can also specify the sound you want to hear for a notification. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Select an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate option. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound for Reminders, New messages, New e-mail, Alarm clock, Warnings, and Keypad control. Press Done. 3. NOTE: Turning off notifications helps conserve battery power. Adjusting Speaker Volume i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Use the Volume key to increase or decrease the speaker volume. Changing the Power Management Settings Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Select Display time out. Select the length of time. Press Done. 1. 2. 3. 4. Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Select Backlight time out on battery or Backlight time out on AC. Select the length of time. Press Done. Adjusting the Volume 23 You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Scroll and increase or decrease the brightness from Brightness list. Press Done. Installing and Removing Programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. 2. 3. Check the screen on your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the program installation. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Remove Programs. Select the programs you want to remove and then press Menu >

Remove. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you may increase available memory on the device. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be re-installed using ActiveSync. Open the Microsoft ActiveSync help on your computer, click Tools > Add/Remove Programs. Select the program to be added and click OK. Opening and Closing Programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program and press Start, then select the program you want from the list. 24 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i In most cases, programs automatically stop to get free needed memory. However, you can close programs manually, if you prefer. Press Start > More > Accessories > Task Manager. 1. From the Application list, select the application you want to close, and 2. press Menu > Kill, or pressMenu > Kill All to close all open applications. Customizing the HP iPAQ To get detailed information:

Press Start > Settings > More... > About. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network NOTE:

each device must have a unique name. If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, To change the device name:

1. 2. Navigate to select Device Name and enter a name in the Device Press Start > Settings > More... > Owner Information. Name box. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9, and cannot contain spaces. Press Done. Setting Alarms 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm > Alarm. Scroll to Alarm time and set the alarm time. Scroll and select the required option from the Alarm list. Press Done. Customizing the HP iPAQ 25 Creating and Assigning a Category In the Contacts and Tasks programs, you can use categories to help organize and group your contacts and tasks. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and press Edit >

Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, press Menu > Edit >

Categories. For a new item in Contacts and Tasks, select Categories. Enter the category name and then press Done. The new category is automatically assigned to the item. Press Done to return to the contact or task. 3. 4. NOTE: Categories are shared between your contacts and tasks. A category remains in the list of shared categories as long as it is assigned to at least one contact or task. Synchronization Microsoft ActiveSync software, located on the Getting Started CD, allows your HP iPAQ and your computer to communicate with each other. For synchronization to work properly, install Microsoft ActiveSync on your computer before you connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Use Microsoft ActiveSync to:

Synchronize information between your HP iPAQ and up to two computers or one server so that you have the latest information in all locations Change synchronization settings and the synchronization schedule Copy files between your device and computer Install applications on your HP iPAQ Synchronize links 26 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Send and receive e-mail Request meetings Synchronizing your HP iPAQ with your computer allows you to keep the same information (such as calendar, contacts, and e-mail messages) on both units, making it available when you work on your computer or when you take your HP iPAQ on the go. There are several ways to synchronize your HP iPAQ with your computer:

mini-USB synchronization cable To synchronize your HP iPAQ and your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable:

1. 2. Be sure ActiveSync 4.5 or later is installed on your computer. Plug the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into your computer. Bluetooth 3. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the universal sync connector on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. Synchronization begins automatically. CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC Adapter, check to be sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting them. 4. Click Next on the Synchronization Setup Wizard screen. 5. Perform one of the following:

By default, the check box is selected to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange Server. Clear this check box if you do not want to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange server and then click Next. Click Next if you want to synchronize directly with Microsoft Outlook. Synchronization 27 6. When the Synchronization Options screen displays, select the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer and then click Next. After your items have been synchronized, click Finish. The Synchronization Setup Wizard starts synchronizing the items you selected. 7. If ActiveSync does not begin the synchronization process, start it manually:

On your computer, open ActiveSync by selecting Start > All Programs >

Microsoft ActiveSync. Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection You can change the type of ActiveSync connection being used between your HP iPAQ and your computer to meet your specific needs. You should use USB Serial Sync Mode if you:

Are having general problems with the ActiveSync connection between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Need to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer while you are using a virtual private network (VPN) tunnel from your computer. Are running personal or company-enforced firewall software on your computer. You should use USB RNDIS Mode if you are transferring large files and do not have any connection issues between your HP iPAQ and your computer. To change the ActiveSync mode on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > More... > USB. Press Menu > ActiveSync Settings. Scroll and select RNDIS. Press Done to change the ActiveSync mode or press the Back button to return to Connections without saving the changes. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues This section gives information different synchronization troubleshooting issues and their solutions. The Web sites with additional information on troubleshooting is also included. 28 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Following is a list of symptoms that may indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync chimes sound (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. ActiveSync chimes sound, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The retrieving settings message appears on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. ActiveSync is searching for a connection but none occurs. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Confirm that you are running ActiveSync on your computer with a supported operating system (OS). To get more information about the supported OS versions, visit:

www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. The latest version of ActiveSync is at: www.microsoft.com. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall programs exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PC-

cillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite may block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the programs exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit: www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/help/activesync. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues 29 During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Be sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Place a check mark in the boxes under the computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-

based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your PC and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your PC. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel

> Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ 30 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues 31 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key You can use the Home key to return back to the Home screen from any application. You can do the following tasks using the Home key:

Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. The Quick List displays a list of available profile types and commands. Press the Home key and use the keypad to dial a number. Using the Back key The Back key is used to return to the previous screen. It is similar to moving a folder up in your computer. Using the 4-Way Navigation Key The 4-Way Navigation key is used to navigate the menu system, change feature settings, and play games. It is also used to scroll up and down the list to select a desired function. TIP: Down and up are your primary movements within menus and navigation through the contacts. Move left and right to change feature settings and edit text. Select a program icon at the top of the Home screen and then press theAction button to open the program. Select an item in the center of the Home screen and then press the Action button to access the settings associated with the selected item. Calling Features Subscribing to a Mobile Phone Service Provider Before you can use the phone feature on your HP iPAQ, you must subscribe to a mobile phone service provider. 32 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone The following features supported on your HP iPAQ must be activated by your mobile phone service provider:

Call Forwarding CSD - Circuit Switched Data GPRS - General Packet Radio Service International Dialing International Roaming Internet Access Text Message/MMS - Text Message Service/Multimedia Messaging Service voice mail VPN - Virtual Private Network For more information on these services, contact your mobile phone service provider. If you purchased your HP iPAQ from a mobile phone service provider, phone service may be activated at time of purchase or the mobile service provider may include activation instructions. If you purchased a prepaid SIM card to use with your HP iPAQ or if your service provider issued you a SIM card with a preset PIN, the following information is not applicable. You must call the service provider to activate your mobile phone service. Your carrier may require the following information to activate your service:

SIM Card Serial Number (printed on the box label or on the back of the SIM card) IMEI Number (printed on the HP iPAQ label under the removable battery) Your mobile phone service representative gives you your wireless phone number and helps you set up your service. Making a Call 1. Use keypad to enter the number you want to call. 2. Press the Send key to make the call. Calling Features 33 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i TIP: To call the person that you called last, press the Send key twice. Answering a Call To answer a call, press the Send key or press Answer on the on-screen phone keypad. When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call, the phone stops ringing and the caller may be sent to voice mail, depending on your mobile phone service provider. To disregard the call, press Ignore on the on-screen keypad or press the End Call key. Using Call Waiting Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are on another call. To turn on call waiting:

1. 2. 3. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting. Select the Provide call waiting notification check box. Press Done to save the settings. Press Answer to move the current phone call to Call Waiting. The incoming phone call on Call Waiting displays on the screen. Press the Send key to answer the incoming call or press Ignore on the on-screen keypad if you do not want to answer the call. Press Swap to toggle between the calls. 2. 3. Redialing a Number To redial the last number called from the Home screen:

Press the Send key twice. Calling a Contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. 34 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Making a Call from the Home Screen To make calls from the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to enter the contact name. 2. In case there are more than one contacts with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Press the Send key to make the call. 3. e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Making a Call from the Contacts You can select a persons name from your contacts list and press the Send key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact name. Press the Send key to place a call. TIP:

If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contacts name. Your HP iPAQ searches the entire contacts list to display the name. Changing the Default Number for a Contact The Work phone number is set as the default. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the default contact. Scroll and select to change default number. Making a Call to a Desired Phone Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact you want to call. Press the Action button to open the contact. Scroll to the number you want to call. Press the Send key to place the call. Calling Features 35 Making a Call Using Voice Dialing You can dial a phone number by speaking a name saved in your contacts list of the HP iPAQ's memory or by speaking numbers continuously. For more information refer to the chapter Voice Commands. Making Emergency Calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstances, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your HP iPAQs preprogrammed emergency number(s) may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. From the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to dial the local emergency number. 2. Press the Send key to place the call. Making Calls Using Speed Dials You can quickly dial phone numbers by assigning speed dial numbers. Press and hold one or two keys from the Home screen to make a speed dial call. You can choose speed dial entries from 2-99. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial setting is available only for a phone number stored in the Contacts of the phone memory. To create a speed dial shortcut:

1. 2. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the desired contact and press the Action button to open the contact. Scroll to the desired number and press Menu to open menu functions. 3. 36 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Select Add to Speed Dial. 4. 5. Use navigation keys to select a speed dial number from 2-99 under Keypad assignment. Press Done. 6. e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and e-mail addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

Press and hold the keypad number that you have assigned as a speed dial number. If the keypad assignment has two digits, press the first digit, then press and hold the second digit. Using voice mail From Home Screen:

Press and hold 1 to automatically call voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The voice mail shortcut may need to be set up by the user. Using the Handsfree Function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree mobile phone. 1. 2. Press Menu to open the menu options. Scroll to Speakerphone and press the Action button to turn the speaker on and the earpiece off. Monitoring Phone Use Call Timers contains the length of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use Call Timers to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan or estimate your monthly billing. Press Start > Call History > Menu > View Timers. Making Data Calls Use Data Connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS), dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and Wi-Fi connections Calling Features 37 so you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download e-mail, chat using MSN Messenger, or synchronize with the server without using wires. Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the data call by pressing End . This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your Information Technology (IT) manager for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring e-mail or wireless synchronizing with the server. For more information, refer to the chapter Connections. Muting a Call You can mute the microphone for the active call. The other party will not hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. During a call:

Press Mute. Putting a Call on Hold During a call, you can put the call on hold so you can call another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, press Menu and then select Hold. To switch between calls, press Swap. Making a Conference Call You can talk to two or more people simultaneously, using the conference call facility. 1. 2. Use the keypad to dial the first number. Press the Send key. 38 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Press the Send key. After you are connected, press Hold. 3. 4. 5. Dial the second number, and then press the Send key. 6. After you are connected, press Menu > Conference. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then press Menu > Conference. Making a Call From a Hyperlink Phone Number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an e-

mail or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an e-mail or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. 2. Scroll to the hyperlink phone number. Press the Action button to place the call. Dialing International Numbers You can make an international call from your HP iPAQ. To make an international call, enter a country code before the phone number. 1. On the Home screen, press and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign appears. 2. Enter the country code and phone number. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a Contact's phone number for faster dialing. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength After you insert an active SIM card into your HP iPAQ, your unit connects to your service provider's network. The signal strength icon indicates that you are connected to your service provider's network. A full strength connection is indicated by a full signal strength icon. The number of vertical bars in the icon diminish as the signal strength diminishes. No bars indicate no signal. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength 39 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number For security purposes, the SIM Personal Identification Number (PIN) protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Confirm your new pin in Confirm new PIN box. 6. Press Start > Settings > Security. Select Change PIN2. Enter your current pin in Old PIN box. Enter your new pin in New PIN box. Press Done. Using Call History Managing Calls Using Call History Call History provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. Press Start > Call History to view all of the calls in Call History. Press Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the Call History view. Press Menu > View Timers > Menu > Reset Timers, to reset the Recent Calls counter NOTE: The All Calls counter cannot be reset. Press Menu > Delete Lists to clear the entire Call History. Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager, you can easily turn on/off the functions of Wi-Fi connection, Bluetooth connection, and Phone features. 40 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i NOTE: When the Phone feature is turned off, you cannot receive or make a call, including an emergency calls. To receive and make a call, turn on the Phone feature and re-engage your phones RF capability. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Option Description All Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Phone. Wi-Fi Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Wi-Fi connection. Bluetoo th Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Bluetooth connection. Phone Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Phone features. Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn all wireless connections on/off at the same time:

1. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections >

Wireless Manager. Select All and press Action button to turn all wireless connections on/

off. 2. Flight Mode Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn all wireless connections on/off at the same time:

1. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections >

Wireless Manager. Select All and press Action button to turn all wireless connections on/

off. 2. Wireless Manager 41 Quick Launch Quick Launch is a simple way for you to open the Quick List that lets you turn off your HP iPAQ, manage wireless connections, change profiles, or lock your keypad. To access the Quick List:

1. 2. Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. Scroll to select from the list. Changing Phone Settings Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Scroll and select a ring tone from the Ring tone box. Press Done. Changing Service Settings Changing Phone Service Settings After your phone service is set up through your mobile phone service provider, you can change service settings on your HP iPAQ. You can block certain types of incoming and/or outgoing calls, forward incoming calls to a different phone number, be notified of incoming calls when you are already in a phone session, or let others know your identity when making calls. To change service settings on the HP iPAQ:

Press Start > Settings > Phone button. 1. 2. Select the service you want to change. 3. Make your changes and press Done. Auto Answer You can set time for automatic answering your calls when using your handsfree. 42 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i NOTE: These settings do not apply when your ring type is silent. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Phone More > Auto Answer. Select time for Auto Answer using navigation key. Press Done . Call Barring You can block incoming and/or outgoing calls on your HP iPAQ. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Barring. Call Forwarding 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Forwarding. Select the required condition from the list. Scroll and select Custom from the Forward voice calls to box. Enter the phone number to which the call must be forwarded in Phone number box. You can forward your calls to a different phone number for the following conditions:

Unconditional: forward the call without waiting for a reply. No Reply: if the call is not answered. Busy: if line is busy. Unavailable: if service is unavailable. Data Calls Fax Calls Call Options Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Options to change any of the available call options. Any key answer: access this facility by selecting the Any key answer check box. Show SIM contents: this check box is selected by default. voice mail number: you can enter/change your voice mail number here. Changing Service Settings 43 Internet voice mail number: you can enter/change your Internet voice mail number here. Text messages service center: it is set by the service provider. Country code: Enter your country code. Area code: Enter your area code. Call waiting Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting and select the Provide call waiting notification check box to access the call waiting facility. Caller ID You can request the network provider to display/hide your caller ID Changing Network Settings You can switch from one network to other as follows:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Phone. Select Networks to view your Current network, or Network selection to switch to a different network. TIP: You can select a different network by either automatically or manually searching the network. Profiles You can use profiles on your HP iPAQ to personalize the ringtones, ring volumes, and other settings according to your choice. Using profiles To select a profile:

1. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. TIP: You can also set profiles using Voice Commander. 2. Select any of the listed profiles and press Done to choose that profile. 44 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Editing profiles To edit a profile:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. Press Menu > Edit. Scroll and select to edit the following features in a profile:

Name Ring type Ring volume Alarm type Alarm volume Reminder type Reminder volume Notification type System sound volume Automatic Frequency Band Selection Your HP iPAQ has an integrated GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication)/GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)/EDGE(Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution) feature that supports four (850/900/1800/1900) different frequency bands for international roaming. When traveling, between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature changes the connection settings by generating an automatic search for frequency bands when your home bands are not available. This feature is the default setting on your HP iPAQ. To avoid problems After you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile HP iPAQ service provider's Web site to see if service is available where you are traveling. Verify your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Automatic Frequency Band Selection 45 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device You can copy a contact from the SIM to the device as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Press Menu > Copy Contact. Press Menu > Edit to edit the contact information as needed. Press Done. ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and e-mail with Exchange/Outlook You can synchronize Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and E-mail with Exchange/Outlook 1. After your computer is in sync with your HP iPAQ, click Tools >

Options on the Microsoft ActiveSync dialog box. Select the check boxes which you want to synchronize. 2. 3. Click OK. Setting up E-mail Before sending and receiving e-mail messages, you may have to complete the e-mail account setup. You can send e-mail messages by synchronizing or connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider

(ISP) or a corporate network. You can only have one configurable Outlook E-

Mail at one time and therefore only synchronize one type of e-mail, either POP3 or computer. If you choose to synchronize your computer e-mail, it will wipe out your POP3 settings. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Options Description Your name Type your name E-mail address Enter your e-mail address Automatic setup If you check this feature, your HP iPAQ will obtain e-mail settings from the Internet. If you clear this feature, continue the following settings. 46 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i User name Enter your user name Password Domain (if necessary) Enter your password Enter your domain name, if necessary Save password Check this feature and you need not to enter in your password repeatedly before you send/receive e-mails. Server type Select either POP3 or IMAP4 Account name Enter in your account name Select The Internet Enter in your incoming mail server Check this feature, if necessary Enter in your outgoing mail server Check this feature, if necessary Use navigation keys to select messages you want to receive Use navigation keys to select an option Network Incoming Server Require SSL connection Outgoing Server Outgoing server requires authentication Download the following messages Connect automatically and check for messages Setting up E-mail 47 3. 1. 2. Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Exchange Server option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next again to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. Select the checkbox of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. 4. 5. 6. Voice Notes You can use Voice recorder to record audio clips. You can attach them as voice notes to e-mails, MMS, and meeting notes. For more information on voice notes refer chapter Notes. 48 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone 7 Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

Wi-Fi Press Start > Settings > Connections to access all these connection types. Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE Connecting to Intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter the URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Press Menu > Add and in In URL Pattern, enter the intranet URL. 3. If you use many URLs that share the same root company NOTE:

name, you can avoid entering them individually by entering

*.companyname.com. Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter an URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Select the intranet URL you want to change, and then press Menu >

Edit to edit. Press Delete to delete the URL. Setting Up Proxy Settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings Connecting to Intranet URLs 49 s n o i t c e n n o C during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your (ISP) or network administrator:

To set up proxy server settings:

1. 2. User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used Press Start > Settings > Connections > Proxy. Press Menu > Add to set up a new proxy server connection. Press Menu > Edit to edit a proxy server. Scroll to select the required option from the Connects from list. Scroll to select the The Internet option from the Connects to list. In the Proxy (name:port) box, enter the proxy server name and port. Scroll to select the required protocol option from the Type list. Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect 3. 4. 5. 6. You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To set up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Scroll to select your country from the Country list. Scroll to select your operator from the Operator list. Press Menu > Save to save your operator and country settings. Your HP iPAQ will automatically create a new GPRS connection using your operator settings. 50 Chapter 7 Connections Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 1. 2. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. If you are configuring a Socks proxy, select Socks 4 or Socks 5. If using Socks 5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Setting Up a VPN Connection User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server A Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

To set up a VPN server connection:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Select VPN and press the Action button. Enter the details given by the network administrator. To Edit details of an already existing VPN connection, scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Edit. NOTE: To delete an existing connection scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Delete. Wi-Fi With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 51 s n o i t c e n n o C device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLAN-enabled devices. With Wi-Fi you can:

Access the Internet Send and receive e-mail Access corporate network information Use Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) for secure remote access Use hotspots for wireless connectivity NOTE: Use of dial-up and wireless Internet, e-mail, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, may require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard Wi-Fi infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. Wi-Fi Terms Term Definition 802.11 standard An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Device-to-computer or ad-hoc A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-

to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. Domain Name System

(DNS) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. Encryption An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. 52 Chapter 7 Connections Term Hotspots Definition Public or private areas where you can access Wi-Fi service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. Infrastructure This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When you turn on the Wi-Fi radio, your HP iPAQ automatically detects Wi-Fi networks that are broadcasting their signal. If your Wi-Fi network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it manually. Before trying to connect to a Wi-Fi network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Scroll and select Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi on. After your HP iPAQ detects any existing Wi-Fi network, select the network you want to connect to and press Connect. Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi > New. Enter the network name. 1. 2. 3. Choose a network type. Select Internet to connect to the Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or select Private/Work Network to s n o i t c e n n o C Wi-Fi 53 4. connect to a company network. You should only choose Private/Work if the network requires a proxy server. Press Next to go to the Network Key screen. To use authentication, select the authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data encryption list. To automatically use a network key, select the The key is automatically provided check box. Else, enter the network key. NOTE: To delete a Wi-Fi connection, press Start > Settings >

Connections > Wi-Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Finding an IP Address You need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network to find the IP address of your connection 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > More > Wireless LAN. Press Menu > Advanced to find the IP address and network related details of your connection. Deleting a Wireless Network Connection You can delete networks you manually entered. However, if a network was automatically detected, you cannot delete it. To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. To delete a connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-

Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. 2. Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings 802.1x authentication settings provide a method to protect the network behind the access point from intruders as well as provide for dynamic keys and strengthen Wi-Fi encryption. Before performing these steps, determine if 54 Chapter 7 Connections authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. To manually enter information, press Start > Settings > Connections

> Wi-Fi. Select the network you want to configure and press Menu > Edit. Press Next twice to reach 802.1x screen. Press Use IEEE 802.1x network access control, and then select appropriate EAP type. 2. 3. Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant You can make voice calls using VoIP and IP PBX (Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. To make calls using IP PBX:

1. On the Home screen, scroll to Internet calling, which is off by default, and press the Action button. Scroll and select the required option from the Use Internet Calling box. You need to configure the Wi-Fi settings before you can use VoIP. 2. 3. 4. On the Home screen, the Internet Callingstatus changes to available or selected. 5. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the Send key. NOTE: On the Home, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service , it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration >

New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant 55 s n o i t c e n n o C 4. 5. 6. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider if available. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy checkbox if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. Enter the Voice Mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to connect to any computer or any other compatible device without using cables. Bluetooth Terms Term Authentication Authorization Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Bonding (Paired devices) Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Device address Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Device discovery Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Device ID Encryption Passkey Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. 56 Chapter 7 Connections Term Definition Personal Information Manager (PIM) Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks (for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Profiles Collection of Bluetooth settings. Service discovery Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Changing Bluetooth Settings 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Scroll and select the bluetooth connection for which you want to change the settings. Follow the on screen instructions and press Done. Connecting To Bluetooth Headset PLACEHOLDER FOR CONTENT- Require more information on how this feature functions. This feature will be available on select models only. Bluetooth Device Profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Object Exchange (OBEX) Protocol s n o i t c e n n o C Bluetooth 57 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. Object Push Protocol (OPP) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership You can create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. After you do this, the devices must have Bluetooth turned on but do not need to be discoverable for you to exchange information between them. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within 10 meters from each other. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. To create a new partnership. press Add New Device. Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. Select the name of the other device you want to create a partnership with and press Next. Specify a Passkey for authentication. Enter the same Passkey on the other device. Press Done. NOTE: Press Menu > Edit to rename a partnership. To end a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth to view all the partnerships you created on your HP iPAQ. Scroll and select the connection you want to delete. Press Menu >

Delete To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, press Yes. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric Passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey, and press Next. Enter the same 3. 58 Chapter 7 Connections 4. Passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a Passkey provides greater security. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Display Name. Press Done. 5. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is switched on and is in the discoverable mode. Making a Device Discoverable 1. 2. Press Start > Setting > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Turn On Visibility. NOTE:

Menu > Turn Off Visibility. If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, press Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Com Ports to set up a new port. Press Menu > New Outgoing Port. s n o i t c e n n o C NOTE: A new Outgoing Port is available only if there is atleast one Bluetooth device supporting serial (COM) connection. 5. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE: A port is in use if it cannot be created, if so then select a different numbered port. Bluetooth 59 6. 7. To limit communication on this COM port only to devices with which your HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure connection check box. Press Done. Ending a Connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via mini-USB synchronization cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. When connected via Bluetooth, press Start > Settings > Connections

> Bluetooth and then press Menu > Turn off Bluetooth to end a bluetooth connection When connected via Wi-Fi, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-

Fi and then press Menu > Turn off Wi-Fi to end a Wi-Fi connection GPRS/EDGE EDGE technology provides a connection to the mobile phone network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means with EDGE, your HP iPAQ can have faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Your HP iPAQ supports GPRS. If you want to HP iPAQ to support EDGE technologies, contact your service provider. Changing GPRS Network Settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS 60 Chapter 7 Connections connection information for you. You can change these settings or create your own network settings to your requirements. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > GPRS. If your operator name appears in the list, select the name and press Menu > Edit to edit the GPRS network settings. Editing Network Parameters CAUTION: Editing network parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. Connecting to a Laptop You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ and guides you during the connection process. If you have not done so, insert a GPRS-enabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You may also need to install the software drivers

(located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To Connect to a laptop using a USB data connection You may need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization data cable. Your computer may prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device 3.

(recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. 4. s n o i t c e n n o C Connecting to a Laptop 61 NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization data cable and press Connect. To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. Setting Up a Bluetooth Modem Connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 62 Chapter 7 Connections 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ to communicate with your computer and manage your pictures, data and music folders easily. To use ActiveSync over cable:

1. Connect the USB end of the synchronization cable to a USB port on your computer. 2. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the charging/

communications port on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. The connector fits only one way so do not force it. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. 3. When prompted, check the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Select the folder you want to synchronize. 4. 5. Click Explore on the computer ActiveSync dialog box to explore folders present on your HP iPAQ. Press Sync to synchronize the selected folders. 6. NOTE: To configure ActiveSync over GPRS, contact your corporate network administrator. To use ActiveSync over Bluetooth:

NOTE: For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB synchronization cable to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, press Start > More > ActiveSync. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth 63 s n o i t c e n n o C 3. 4. 5. Press Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and the computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Use ActiveSync Help to do this. Press Sync. After you finish synchronization, press Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. 64 Chapter 7 Connections 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to click and view photos. To Capture Photos Press Start > More > Camera. You can capture images and store them in your HP iPAQ or memory card. 1. 2. Use the 4way Navigation key to zoom in or out. 3. Use the 4way Navigation key to decrease or increase brightness. 4. Press the Action button to click a photo and automatically save it in File manager > My Documents > My Pictures. To View Photos Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. You can view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Navigate to a required folder or image. 3. 4. Navigate the folder to select a required image, and then press View. To Change Image Sizes Press the Action button once to display photo in full screen view. Press View to view a photo and press Open to open a folder. NOTE: The opened photo displays in the fit to view screen by default. Press the Action button once while in full screen view to display photo in actual view. Press the Action button once while in actual view to return back to fit to screen view. NOTE: You can create folders to manage your pictures. Press Menu > Edit > New Folder to create a new folder. a r e m a C Using the Digital Camera 65 Changing Camera Settings Changing Brightness Settings Press Menu > Brightness. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Changing Resolution Settings Press Menu > Resolution. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The resolution settings can be changed to:

176*144 352*288 320*240 640*480 1280*1024 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it may take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail, or Bluetooth. Changing Mode Settings Press Menu > Mode. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Mode settings can be changed to:

Timer - Set the self-timer to determine after how long you want the camera to click a photo after you press the shutter button. Burst - Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Changing Zoom Settings Press Menu > Zoom. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. 66 Chapter 8 Camera The Zoom settings can be changed to:

Zoom*1(default) Zoom*2 Zoom*3 Changing White Balance Settings Press Menu > White Balance. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The White Balance settings can be changed to:

Automatic (default) Night Sunlight Cloudy Fluorescent Incandescent NOTE: You can choose the preset depending on your shooting conditions. Configuring File settings Use your HP iPAQ File Settings to resize pictures for e-mail and to optimize for slideshow viewing. Press Start > More > Camera, and then press Menu > Options to change one or more of following options:

1. General The general settings can be changed to:

Medium Large (640*480) (default) a r e m a C Changing Camera Settings 67 Small Original The orientation of picture can be changed to:

Left Right 2. Slide Show Landscape Portrait The Slide Show settings can be changed to:

Select the Play Screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes check box to make your computer screensaver your HP iPAQ screensaver. 3. Camera Save Files To: Press the Action button and scroll to select the phone or storage card as the storage device. The default folder on the device is \My Documents\My Pictures\. Type Filename Prefix: Enter the text you want to add at the beginning of the filename. NOTE: You can save the filename prefix with any alpha numeric character and certain symbols. Still image compression level: Press the Action button and scroll to select the required option. NOTE: Higher-quality pictures look better, but are also larger in file size. Lower-quality pictures require less storage space and may take less time when sending by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail. 68 Chapter 8 Camera Using the Camcorder Recording Videos You can use the built-in camcorder in your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Camera. Press Menu > Video. Press theAction button to start recording. Press the Action button again to Stop recording. Configuring Video Format Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos, and then press Menu > Options

> Video. Select the Include audio when recording video files check box to record both audio and video. Set time limit to one of the following:

30 Seconds 15 Seconds No Limit NOTE: By default, all the pictures and videos are stored in \My Documents\My Pictures\. Transfer Images Using GPRS When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. 2. 3. Navigate to highlight Insert Picture area. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. a r e m a C Using the Camcorder 69 Press the Action button to open Pictures & Videos. 4. 5. Navigate to a required picture you want to add and press the Action button. Press Send. Using Bluetooth 6. You can do the following to transfer images from HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. Scroll and select a picture. Press Menu > Beam.... Select the device and press Beam. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. 70 Chapter 8 Camera i g n g a s s e M 9 Messaging You can use your HP iPAQ to keep in touch with your family and friends through messaging. Use your HP iPAQ to keep you updated on your e-mail messages. You can also keep a track of appointments and meetings using your HP iPAQ. Understanding Messages To send and receive e-mail messages using your HP iPAQ:

1. You can send and receive e-mail messages using the Direct Push Technology for Exchange server. You can send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account with Internet Service Provider (ISP). You can also send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account that you access using your Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection. You will need your account settings for VPN connection ( typically a work account ). 2. 3. You can also send pictures, video, and audio files on your phone and storage card using Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) on your HP iPAQ. You can have only pictures, or a combination of pictures and video, or audio that can be sent. Text can also be added to a MMS slide. Text messages can be sent using your HP iPAQ. Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using the phone number as the message address. NOTE: Multimedia Messaging Service, or Internet e-mail is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) e-mail server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your Internet Service Provider (ISP). You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Understanding Messages 71 Using Folders Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items Each Messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

The messages you receive and send through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each account. The way folders work vary by type:

1. ActiveSync: If you use an Outlook e-mail account, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your HP iPAQ. You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for synchronization. The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. You can read the messages while you are away from your computer. 2. MMS/Text Messages: If you use an MMS account or a text message 3. 4. account, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. POP3 account: If you use a POP3 account and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on your HP iPAQ and their copies on the e-mail server. When you connect, the e-mail server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on your HP iPAQ and deletes them from the e-mail server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except your HP iPAQ. IMAP4 account: If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your e-mail server, whether it is from your HP iPAQ or computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your e-mail 72 Chapter 9 Messaging i g n g a s s e M server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronizing E-Mail When you synchronize Outlook e-mail on a computer with your device, e-mail messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook e-mail account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it's deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days only and the first 2KB of each new message is downloaded. NOTE: Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your HP iPAQ via your service provider. Replying to E-mail using HP Voice Reply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In your Outlook Inbox, scroll to the message you want to reply to and press the Action button to open the message. Press Menu > HP Voice Reply , and press Record to record your message. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required, and press Send. Synchronizing E-Mail 73 Composing E-mail using Voice Commander You can use the voice commander feature of your HP iPAQ to select the recipient of your e-mail. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose E-

Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. mail to (contact name) to launch the e-mail compose form with the recipient added. You can now compose your message by entering text or adding an attachment. 3. To compose an audio e-mail:

1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Audio Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. E-mail to (contact name) to start recording. 3. Record your message and press Stop 4. Say Confirm if you want to send the message or say Retry/Cancel. Setting up Messaging Accounts Text Messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message can be no longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters and contain no pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/

Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. 74 Chapter 9 Messaging MMS Messaging The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on your HP iPAQ. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless they request the change. i g n g a s s e M Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Exchange Server option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next. Press Next again to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. Select the checkbox of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. 1. 2. Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Other option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next. Scroll and select Other (POP/IMAP) option from the Your E-mail Provider box. Press Next. Enter Your Name and E-mail Address and press Next. Press Done. 4. 5. 3. Receiving E-mail Attachments An attachment sent with an e-mail message or downloaded from the server appears below the subject of the message. Navigate to select the already Setting up Messaging Accounts 75 downloaded attachment or mark an attachment to download it the next time you send and receive e-mail. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 e-

mail account. If you have an Outlook e-mail account, do the following on ActiveSync dialog box :

1. Click Start > ActiveSync. 2. Click Options. 3. Click E-mail > Settings, and then select Include File Attachments check box. NOTE: To open a recorded message received as an attachment, scroll to the recorded message and press the Action button. If you have an IMAP4 e-mail account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Messaging. Press Menu > Tools > Options. Select the name of the IMAP4 account. Press Next until you reach Server information, and press Options. Press Next twice, and select Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. NOTE: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive e-mail. However, this feature does not work if TNEF is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. Receiving Meeting Requests If you receive your e-mail messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an e-mail server, the server 76 Chapter 9 Messaging must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time may be longer. Change e-mail download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. i g n g a s s e M After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. 2. Press the Action button to open the meeting request you received. Press Accept. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response is sent the next time that you synchronize or connect to your e-mail server, and your device calendar is updated. Creating or Changing a Signature 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Outlook E-mail Press Menu > Tools > Options. Press Signatures and scroll to select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. Select the Include when replying and forwarding check box if wanted. Enter a signature in the box. 5. 6. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each Messaging account. Setting up Messaging Accounts 77 Using Messaging Composing and Sending Messages To compose a New Text Message:

1. 2. Press Start > Messaging. In the message list, press Menu > Switch Accounts and select the account to compose a message. Press Menu > New and navigate to highlight the text area. Enter your text. 3. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. Scroll and select the Insert picture area. Press the Action button and navigate to add the required image. Select a recipient, enter a subject and then press Send. To send Pictures/Videos using MMS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To add preset or recorded audio (except when video already exists):

1. 2. Scroll and select the Insert Audio area. Press the Action button to open the Audio folder and navigate to select a required audio clip. Press Select to attach the audio clip. 3. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the TIP:

Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. Replying to or Forwarding a Message 1. 2. 3. Press the Action button to open the selected message, and then press Menu > Reply,Reply All, or Menu > Forward. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, press Menu

> My Text and navigate to select a required message. Press Send. 78 Chapter 9 Messaging NOTE: You can also use the voice commander to reply to any message. Use HP Voice Reply to reply using an audio e-mail message. Adding an Attachment to a Message 1. 2. In an open message, Press Menu > Insert and select the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. Select the file you want to attach or record a voice note. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. i g n g a s s e M Downloading Messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

1. To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook E-mail account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. 2. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in your Outlook E-mail messaging list, press Menu > Tools >

Options > Message, and select theKeep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an IMAP4 account, press Menu > Folders and navigate to select the Sent Items folder check box. Press Sync to synchronize this folder. Downloading Messages from a Server 1. On the message list, press Menu > Tools > Switch Accounts and select the account you want to use. Press Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and e-mail server are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the device 2. Using Messaging 79 Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. MSN Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft .NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft .NET Passport account, go to : http://www.passport.net.. After you have a account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Signing In and Out of Messenger Press Sign In after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter in your Sign-in name and password. Press Sign In. Press Start > More > Windows Live Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign in the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of Messenger:

Press Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which may result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session. User Accepts an incoming voice call. 80 Chapter 9 Messaging An outgoing voice call is placed. The device is turned off or moves out of range. Sending Instant Messages You can send Instant Messages from your MSN Messenger to people on your list. To send Instant Messages:

1. Select the person to whom you want to send an instant message and press Left Softkey. Enter in your message, and press Left Softkey. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Press Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Press Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Press Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you instant messages. i g n g a s s e M NOTE: Press Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Press Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by pressing Menu > Chats. Changing Your Status You can change your status on the MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Press the Action button to select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. MSN Messenger 81 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments You can also keep the track of appointments as per schedule in various views:

1. In Agenda View, you can keep track of appointments on the current date. In Week View, you can also keep track of appointments in a week. 2. In Month View, you can also keep track of appointments in a month. 3. NOTE: You can select the type of views you want from the Menu options. Creating an Appointment To create an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > New Appointment. Enter your schedule for an appointment. Press Done. Updating an Appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. Press Start > Calendar. Select and open the appointment, and then press Menu > Edit to make your changes. Press Done. 3. Canceling an Appointment When you delete an appointment in Calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment 82 Chapter 10 Calendar has not been synchronized with a computer, it is deleted only from your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Calendar. In Agenda view, select and open the appointment to delete. Press Menu > Delete. Press Yes to delete the appointment, or press No to keep it. NOTE: Calendar items can be deleted only from Agenda view or from an open calendar appointment. To delete from Week and Month views, open the appointment, and press Menu > Delete. TIP: You can also press Start > Calendar, select the appointment to delete and press Menu > Delete Appointment. Changing the Display of the Work Week You can customize your calendar so a work week starts on Sunday or Monday and continues from five to seven days. To change the display of the work week:

1. 2. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, select Sunday or Monday in the First day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, select 5-

day week, 6-day week, or 7-day week in the Week view box. 3. Press Done. Changing the Display of the Work Week 83 r a d n e a C l 11 Contacts Adding a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Press New to add a new contact. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact type. Enter the information. Press Done. TIP: Select Outlook Contact type to enter more information about contact. Deleting a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to delete. Press Menu > Delete Contact. Press Yes to delete the contact, or press No to keep it. Changing Contact Information Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit and make your changes. 1. 2. 3. 4. When finished, press Done. To include a nickname, job title, and more information, for an existing contact in the contact list, select the name of the contact, press Menu > Edit, update the information and press Done. Copying a Contact 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to copy. Press Menu > Copy Contact. 84 Chapter 11 Contacts Select the copy of the contact to make your changes. Press Menu > Edit. 4. 5. 6. Change the contact information as needed and press Done. NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Adding a Photo To add a photo to contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the photo you want to add. Select Camera and take a photo. Press Done. 6. Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select the address you want to send a message to and pressE-mail. Select the account you want to send the message from. Enter your message and press Send. s t c a t n o C NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, select the To, Cc, or Bcc line, and press Menu > Add Recipient. Select the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address. Adding a Photo 85 Sending a Text Message to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select Send text messageand press Text. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, press Menu

> My Text and select a desired message. Press Send. 5. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, press Menu > Message Options. Select the Request delivery notifications check box and press Done. Adding and Removing a Picture To add a picture to contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the picture you want to add. Select Camera and take a picture. Press Done. 6. To remove a picture from contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Press Menu > Remove Picture. Press Yes to remove the picture, or press No to keep it. 86 Chapter 11 Contacts Working with the Contact List There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. Here are a few tips on how to make it work for you. 1. 2. Press Start > Contacts. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Name view. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, press Menu > View By > Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, press the contact. From there you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, press and hold the contact. s t c a t n o C Working with the Contact List 87 12 Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3s using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS office applications to view presentations, Excel sheets and word documents. Using HP Applications HP Voice Reply You can use the HP Voice Reply feature on your HP iPAQ to record a message instead of pressing buttons for a text response and save your time. 1. In your Outlook Inbox, scroll to the message you want to reply to and press the Action button to open the message. Press Menu > HP Voice Reply , and press Record to record your message. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required, and press Send. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: Ensure that you have adequate space on your HP iPAQ to avoid any kind of alerts related to storage space while recording a voice reply. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, 88 Chapter 12 Applications modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information - Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network - Wireless Network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy - Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. E-mail - E-mail settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet e-mail accounts. Exchange Server - Exchange Server is used to access e-mail, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to sync directly with your organizations Exchange Server. VoIP - VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) routes voice conversations using an IP-based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. Speed Dial - HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider may also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite - Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish - In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. Using HP Applications 89 s n o i t a c i l p p A Voice Commands Use your voice to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the Voice Commander button to launch the voice commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command to the microphone. NOTE: You can also launch the voice commander by pressing the hookswitch on our HP iPAQ headset. Call a contact saved in the contact list Find a contact saved in the contact list To call numbers not stored in contact list To play, pause, or/and resume music To play a existing music file You can call a contact saved in contact list by speaking Call followed by his name or by speaking his 7 digit or 10 digit number without a pause. You can find a contact saved in contact list by speaking Find followed by the name of the contact. Say Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number. Say Redial to redial the number and say Callback to call back the last dialled number. You can play music, pause it, and resume by speaking Play Music/Pause/Resume command. Speak Play followed by the name of the music file. To Play the previous or the next song in the playlist You can play previous or next song in the playlist by speaking Previous/Next command. To open an application View appointments You can open any applications available in your phone by speakingStart followed by the application name. You can speak <Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments to list the appointments for the day, next day or the present week. 90 Chapter 12 Applications Read messages, e-mails, check call history You can view inbox messages, e-mail, or call history by speaking Read<SMS/e-mail> / Call history. View time View the different set of commands To close Voice Commander application To compose e-mail To compose an audio e-mail To change profiles To dial a number using speed dial To record a audio note To see all reminders To schedule a call You can view the time by speaking What is the time. You can speak what can I say? to view a list of commands that can be used. Say Goodbye command to close the Voice Commander application. Say Compose E-mail To (Contact) to launch a e-mail compose form with recipient already added in it. Say Compose Audio E-mail to (Contact) to start recording an audio message and then send it to the recipient Say Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile. Say Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number. Say Start Recording to open the voice recorder ad start recording. Say Reminder to see all the reminders for the day. Say Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact. HP iPAQ Shortcuts Using HP iPAQ Shortcuts HP iPAQ Shortcuts is a quicker way to access an application with single key press. Using HP Applications 91 s n o i t a c i l p p A To use HP iPAQ Shortcuts:

1. On the Home screen, press Shortcuts. 2. Navigate to the application you want to use. 3. Press the Action button or Select to select the application. Editing HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can change the default shortcuts and assign different applications. To change a shortcut:

1. Scroll to the function you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and press Menu > Edit. In the Target navigate to select Tasks, Programs, Web links, or Files. Press the Action button to create the shortcut. 2. 3. Task Manager 1. Press Start > Accessories > Task Manager. TIP: You can also press Start > Accessories > Resource Manager > Menu > Task Manager. 2. From the Application list, select the program you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Kill All to close all open programs. HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use HP iPAQ DataConnect to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To configure GPRS using HP iPAQ Data Connect:

1. 2. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process of setting up GPRS using your HP iPAQ DataConnect . HP iPAQ Tips Use the HP iPAQ Tips to help you perform functions on your HP iPAQ at a faster rate. A tip is displayed every time you switch on your HP iPAQ. Use 92 Chapter 12 Applications these tips to make maximum use of your phone. By default, each tip will displayed on the screen for 30 seconds. You can either choose to read all tips or exit the application. After the first HP iPAQ Tip is displayed, press Next to display the next screen. Press Menu > Exit to close the application. HP QuickStart Tour HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour provides basic information about the tasks and activities you can perform using your HP iPAQ. You can try each feature as you go through this tutorial. You can return to the same position in this QuickStart Tour simply by selecting Start > More > HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour. Using Windows Media MP3 Player Press Start > More > Windows Media to open the windows media player. Using Windows Media 10 series, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. It supports three different display screens:

Play screen (default) To display the Play screen, navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder and press the Action button. Now Playing screen To display the Now Playing screen, press Now Playing from the Play screen. Library screen To display the Library screen, press Menu > Library

> My Device (HP iPAQ) or Memory. NOTE: Press Menu > Update Library to search for folders on your HP iPAQ or memory card and add the folders to the Library screen. To create a new playlist:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open File. 2. Navigate to the required media file, and press Menu > Queue Up to add the media file in the now playing screen. Using Windows Media MP3 Player 93 s n o i t a c i l p p A 3. 4. Press Menu > Now Playing to go to the Now Playing screen. Press Menu > Save Playlist to save the list of media files on the Now Playing screen. NOTE: Navigate the Library screen to select the playlist you want to delete, and then press Menu > Delete From Library. To play a streaming media file on the web:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open URL. 2. To play media files:

1. Navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder, and press the Enter the URL for streaming file, and press OK. Action button. 2. On the play screen, press Menu > Play/Pause to play or pause the media file. Press Menu > Stop to stop the currently playing media file. 3. NOTE: On the Play and Now Playing screen, press Menu >

Shuffle/Repeat to play all the files in the playlist randomly or repeatedly. You can play your media files by using the voice commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music/

Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ.

(Media File Name) to play the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the Voice Commander button and say Pause/

Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. 94 Chapter 12 Applications Using Voice Recorder You can use the voice recording feature of your HP iPAQ to record voice clips, and use them as a voice note in your e-mails or MMSs. To record voice clips:

1. 2. Press Start > More > Voice Recorder. Press Record to start recording a voice clip. Press Menu > Play to play the recorded voice clip. To delete or rename the voice clip, press Menu > Rename/Delete. Press Menu > Set as Ringtone to set the voice clip as your HP iPAQ ringtone. 3. 4. Using MS Office Applications To use MS Excel applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. file. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. 3. 4. To use MS Word applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. file. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. 3. 4. To use MS PowerPoint applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. file. Using Voice Recorder 95 s n o i t a c i l p p A 3. 4. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. File Management Press Start > More > File Manager, to explore the file manager. To view your files and folders use:

Tree View: Displays the entire file structure in your phone memory. The functions in Tree View primarily focus on folder management. List View: Displays the selected folder and its sub-folders and files. The functions in List View are basically file-oriented. Working With Folders To delete a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be deleted, and press Menu >File > Delete. 2. Press Yes to delete. To copy/paste a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be copied, and press Menu > File > Copy To. 2. Navigate the List view to select the destination folder, and press Menu

> Paste to paste the file. To create shortcut:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file for which you want to create a shortcut, and press Menu > File > Create Shortcut. 2. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the destination folder to save the shortcut in and press Done. Playing Games Playing Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer the balls you leave behind, more the scores you get. 96 Chapter 12 Applications To start a new game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. Press Menu > New to open a new game of bubble breaker. Press Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. To edit the settings for the game, press Menu > Options. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, press Menu > Undo. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. Press Menu > New to open a new game of bubble breaker. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Press the Action button twice to delete the balls from the screen. 4. Playing Solitaire The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. Press Menu > More > Games > Solitaire. Press the number or character above the card stack displaying the card you want to move, and press the number or character above the card stack to which you want to move the card. 3. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. NOTE: Press the Navigation Key up to move a card to one of the four card stacks on the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 4. When you have made all the available plays, press Draw to turn over cards. Playing Games 97 s n o i t a c i l p p A Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer mobile favorites. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. 2. Navigate the favorite list and press Go to open the desired link. 3. To open a link using homepage:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer mobile favorites. Press Start > Homepage to go the homepage. Enter the link you want to connect to and press the Action button. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. Press Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and press Menu

> Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Press Menu > History to display the history. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: Press Menu > Options to change General, Connections, and Memory settings. 98 Chapter 12 Applications s d r a C e g a r o t S 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards must be purchased separately and are not included with your HP iPAQ. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/go/

ipaqaccessories. Inserting a Storage Card To insert a storage card into the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Locate the storage card slot at the side of your HP iPAQ. 2. Open the protective cover. 3. Insert the storage card into the storage card slot and push the connection edge of the card firmly into the storage card slot. NOTE:

manufacturer's instructions to install it. If your storage card is not recognized, follow the card If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Be sure the label is facing below. Be sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Be sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Using Storage Cards 99 Removing a Storage Card To remove a Micro Secure Digital (micro-SD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. Remove the card from the storage card slot by lightly pushing on the card to unlock it. 3. When the card disengages and pops out, pull it from the storage card slot. Viewing Content of a Storage Card Press Start > File Manager. Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. 2. Navigate to select the Memory Card folder to see a list of files and folders. If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Be sure you have firmly pushed the storage card into the storage slot. Be sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. 100 Chapter 13 Storage Cards g n i z i n o r h c n y S 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files You can copy (transfer) files to and from your computer using Explore in ActiveSync and Windows Explorer. To copy (transfer) files:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer via the mini-USB synchronization cable. Select Explore. 2. On your computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. 4. Double-click Mobile Device. 5. On your computer, right-click the Start menu, and select Explore. 6. Locate the file to be moved. NOTE: You cannot copy pre-installed files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. Move your files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents), so the programs on your device can locate them. Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 If you used a Palm Operating System (OS) based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0. Copying (or Transferring) Files 101 2. To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6.0:

1. Make sure you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or a higher version installed on your computer. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CD-ROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default e-mail program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for E-mail, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall HotSync from your computer. Click Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computer's CD-ROM drive and follow the on-screen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 5. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Do this 102 Chapter 14 Synchronizing Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device power-down timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. g n i z i n o r h c n y S Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips 103 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task Press Start > Tasks. Select and open the task you want to set start and due dates for. NOTE: To create a new task, press Start > Tasks > Menu >

New Task. Press Edit and do one or both of the following:

Press Done. Select Start date to enter a start date for the task. Select Due date to enter a due date for the task. Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List Press Start > Tasks. Press Menu > Options. Select the Show start and due dates check box. Press Done. Marking a Task as Completed To mark a task as completed:

1. 2. Press Start > Tasks. In the task list, select the task you want to complete and press Complete to mark a check box as completed. To mark an open task as completed:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select and open the task you want to complete. Press Edit. In the Status box, select the Completed check box. Press Done. 104 Chapter 15 Tasks 16 Product Specifications System Specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System tab > Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display LED Backlight Secure Digital (SD) Slot Wired Stereo Headset Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth Description TI OMAP 850 Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Smartphone Edition 128MB/64MB (NAND, ROM/RAM) 5 W maximum output AC adapter with detachable heads, voltage range 100 to 240 V switching, input current 0.2 A AC maximum, input frequency 50 to 60 Hz, output voltage 5 V DC, output current 1 A TFT Micro-reflective, 176x220 2.0, 65K Colors Multi-level brightness adjustment with power save mode Supports micro SD memory 3.5mm jack with dual earbud style headset Included in box Internal, Quad-Band antenna Speaker, and one 3.5mm stereo headset jack 1,100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 1.2, Profiles: Headset/ Hand-free/

OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 meter s n o i t a c i f i c e p S t c u d o r P System Specifications 105 System Feature Description range (approximately 33 feet) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices Wi-Fi Wi-Fi 802.11 b/g Physical Specifications Length Width Depth Weight US 4.65 in 2.8 in 0.71 in 5.8 oz Operating Environment Metric 107.0 mm 48.6 mm 16.3 mm 102 g US Metric Temperature Operating 32 to 104F 0 to 40C Non-operating 4 to 140F 20 to 60C Relative Humidity Operating 85 % RH Non-operating 0%

Maximum Altitude Operating Non-operating 0 - 15,000ft 0 - 40,000ft 85 % RH 0%

0 - 4572m 0 - 12192m 106 Chapter 16 Product Specifications Regulatory Marks Electrical Safety FCC Class B, UL or CSA NRTL, CE [FM]

C-UL, NOM[FM] C-UL s n o i t a c i f i c e p S t c u d o r P Regulatory Marks 107 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 108 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Canadian Notice 109 European Union Notice Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-

marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, 110 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. European Union Notice 111 Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band

(channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-

MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 112 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. http://www.hp.com Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Battery Recycling 113 Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of 114 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.XXX W/kg. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the body is 0.XXX W/kg.

* The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram

(W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. FCC SAR The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram(W/kg). The highest SAR value for the device as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.792 W/kg for GSM Head SAR and 0.644 W/kg for PCS Head SAR, and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.23 W/kg for GSM Body SAR, 0.908 W/kg for PCS Body SAR, and 0.094 W/kg for WLAN Body SAR. (Body-worn measurements differ among device models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements.) Wireless Notices R In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 1.5cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. 116 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELECs standards EN50360 and EN50361 which use the limit of 2 Watts per kilogram (W/

kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested is as follows:

GSM900: 0.158 W/kg (10g) DCS1800: 0.387 W/kg (10g) Japanese Notice Japanese Notice 117 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices 118 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Taiwan DGT Notice Korean Notice Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage your hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. HP recommends to use the headset delivered with your HP iPAQ (part number 430219, manufactured by Plantronics), that is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Taiwan DGT Notice 119 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ appears to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of network signal in good condition?

Is network setup properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. 120 Chapter 18 Frequently Asked Questions d e k s A y l t n e u q e r F s n o i t s e u Q I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How to resolve this?

You may be unable to hear to voices clearly if you turn on the in-call mute function. Turn off this function to be able to listen to voices clearly. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe for these services from your service operator. Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

121 If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

It is recommended to have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ for the device to operate efficiently. To check the free memory space, press Start > Settings > More... > About. Remember to delete or transfer old messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Home screen layout error message if you did not select any Home screen layout. To correct this, press Start > Settings > Home Screen and select a layout for the Home screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. 122 Chapter 18 Frequently Asked Questions 19 Care and Maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-circuit the battery and result in danger. Take a backup of SMS messages on your HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Guidelines for using accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ 123 i e c n a n e t n a M d n a e r a C Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. 124 Chapter 19 Care and Maintenance

 

 

Additional Product Information services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-

Packard Development Company, L.P. First Edition April 2007 Document Part Number: 446232001 Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft, Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP iPAQ Products are Powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 for Smartphone. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-

Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This product's real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and Table of contents 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ ......................................................................................... 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents ............................................................................................................. 2 3 Components Front Panel Components ........................................................................................... 4 Bottom Panel Components ........................................................................................ 5 Left and Right Side Components ............................................................................... 6 Back Panel Components ........................................................................................... 8 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card ....................................... 9 Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover ......................................... 11 Step 3: Charge the battery ....................................................................................... 12 Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ ................................................................................. 13 Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password ............................................................. 13 Finding the Serial Number and Model Number ....................................................... 13 Status Icons ............................................................................................................. 14 5 Learning the Basics Home Screen ........................................................................................................... 18 Battery Saving Tips .................................................................................................. 18 Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ ..................................................................... 19 Entering Text ........................................................................................................... 19 Changing Input Modes ..................................................................................... 19 Entering Text in the Multipress Mode .............................................................. 20 Entering Text in the T9 Mode .......................................................................... 21 Entering the Owner Information ............................................................................... 21 Viewing the Operating System Information ............................................................. 22 Changing the Regional Settings .............................................................................. 22 Adjusting the Volume ............................................................................................... 23 Adjusting Ringer Volume ................................................................................. 23 Adjusting Speaker Volume .............................................................................. 23 Changing the Power Management Settings ............................................................ 23 iii Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight ............................................. 23 Installing and Removing Programs .......................................................................... 24 Opening and Closing Programs ............................................................................... 24 Customizing the HP iPAQ ........................................................................................ 25 Setting Alarms ......................................................................................................... 25 Creating and Assigning a Category ......................................................................... 26 Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 26 Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection ........................................................ 28 Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues ................................................... 28 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key ................................................................................................ 32 Using the Back key .................................................................................................. 32 Using the 4-Way Navigation Key ............................................................................. 32 Calling Features ....................................................................................................... 32 Subscribing to a Mobile Phone Service Provider ............................................. 32 Making a Call ................................................................................................... 33 Answering a Call .............................................................................................. 34 Using Call Waiting ........................................................................................... 34 Redialing a Number ......................................................................................... 34 Calling a Contact ............................................................................................. 34 Making a Call Using Voice Dialing ................................................................... 36 Making Emergency Calls ................................................................................. 36 Making Calls Using Speed Dials ...................................................................... 36 Using voice mail ............................................................................................... 37 Using the Handsfree Function ......................................................................... 37 Monitoring Phone Use ..................................................................................... 37 Making Data Calls ............................................................................................ 37 Muting a Call .................................................................................................... 38 Putting a Call on Hold ...................................................................................... 38 Making a Conference Call ............................................................................... 38 Making a Call From a Hyperlink Phone Number ............................................. 39 Dialing International Numbers ......................................................................... 39 Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength ..................................................... 39 Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number .................................................. 40 Using Call History .................................................................................................... 40 Managing Calls Using Call History .................................................................. 40 Wireless Manager .................................................................................................... 40 Using Wireless Manager .................................................................................. 40 Flight Mode ...................................................................................................... 41 Quick Launch ........................................................................................................... 42 iv Changing Phone Settings ........................................................................................ 42 Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type ......................................................... 42 Changing Service Settings ...................................................................................... 42 Changing Phone Service Settings ................................................................... 42 Changing Network Settings ..................................................................................... 44 Profiles ..................................................................................................................... 44 Using profiles ................................................................................................... 44 Editing profiles ................................................................................................. 45 Automatic Frequency Band Selection ...................................................................... 45 Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device ............................................................ 46 ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and e-mail with Exchange/Outlook ................................................................................................... 46 Setting up E-mail ..................................................................................................... 46 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server ............................................................... 48 Voice Notes ............................................................................................................. 48 7 Connections Connecting to Intranet URLs ................................................................................... 49 Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL ..................................................................... 49 Setting Up Proxy Settings ........................................................................................ 49 Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect ...................................................... 50 Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings ..................................................................... 51 Setting Up a VPN Connection ................................................................................. 51 Wi-Fi ........................................................................................................................ 51 Wi-Fi Terms ..................................................................................................... 52 Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .................................................. 53 Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network ......................................................... 53 Finding an IP Address ..................................................................................... 54 Deleting a Wireless Network Connection ........................................................ 54 Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings ..................................................... 54 Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant ............................................... 55 Bluetooth .................................................................................................................. 56 Bluetooth Terms .............................................................................................. 56 Changing Bluetooth Settings ........................................................................... 57 Connecting To Bluetooth Headset ................................................................... 57 Bluetooth Device Profiles ................................................................................. 57 Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership ............................... 58 Making a Device Discoverable ........................................................................ 59 Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port ............................................... 59 Ending a Connection ....................................................................................... 60 GPRS/EDGE ........................................................................................................... 60 v Changing GPRS Network Settings .................................................................. 60 Editing Network Parameters ............................................................................ 61 Connecting to a Laptop ............................................................................................ 61 To Connect to a laptop using a USB data connection ..................................... 61 To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection ............................... 62 ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth .................................................. 63 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera ......................................................................................... 65 To Capture Photos ........................................................................................... 65 To View Photos ................................................................................................ 65 Changing Camera Settings ...................................................................................... 66 Changing Brightness Settings ......................................................................... 66 Changing Resolution Settings ......................................................................... 66 Changing Mode Settings ................................................................................. 66 Changing Zoom Settings ................................................................................. 66 Changing White Balance Settings ................................................................... 67 Configuring File settings .................................................................................. 67 Using the Camcorder ............................................................................................... 69 Recording Videos ............................................................................................ 69 Configuring Video Format ................................................................................ 69 Transfer Images ....................................................................................................... 69 Using GPRS .................................................................................................... 69 Using Bluetooth ............................................................................................... 70 9 Messaging Understanding Messages ........................................................................................ 71 Using Folders ........................................................................................................... 72 Synchronizing E-Mail ............................................................................................... 73 Replying to E-mail using HP Voice Reply ................................................................ 73 Composing E-mail using Voice Commander ........................................................... 74 Setting up Messaging Accounts .............................................................................. 74 Text Messaging ............................................................................................... 74 MMS Messaging .............................................................................................. 75 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server ....................................................... 75 Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account ............................................ 75 Receiving E-mail Attachments ......................................................................... 75 Receiving Meeting Requests ........................................................................... 76 Creating or Changing a Signature ................................................................... 77 Using Messaging ..................................................................................................... 78 vi Composing and Sending Messages ................................................................ 78 Replying to or Forwarding a Message ............................................................. 78 Adding an Attachment to a Message ............................................................... 79 Downloading Messages ................................................................................... 79 Downloading Messages from a Server ............................................................ 79 MSN Messenger ...................................................................................................... 80 Signing In and Out of Messenger .................................................................... 80 Sending Instant Messages .............................................................................. 81 Changing Your Status ...................................................................................... 81 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments ............................................................................... 82 Creating an Appointment ......................................................................................... 82 Updating an Appointment ........................................................................................ 82 Canceling an Appointment ....................................................................................... 82 Changing the Display of the Work Week ................................................................. 83 11 Contacts Adding a Contact ..................................................................................................... 84 Deleting a Contact ................................................................................................... 84 Changing Contact Information ................................................................................. 84 Copying a Contact ................................................................................................... 84 Adding a Photo ........................................................................................................ 85 Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact ............................................................... 85 Sending a Text Message to a Contact ..................................................................... 86 Adding and Removing a Picture .............................................................................. 86 Working with the Contact List .................................................................................. 87 12 Applications Using HP Applications ............................................................................................. 88 HP Voice Reply ................................................................................................ 88 HP iPAQ Setup Assistant ................................................................................ 88 Voice Commands ............................................................................................ 90 HP iPAQ Shortcuts .......................................................................................... 91 Task Manager .................................................................................................. 92 HP iPAQ DataConnect .................................................................................... 92 HP iPAQ Tips ................................................................................................... 92 HP QuickStart Tour .......................................................................................... 93 Using Windows Media MP3 Player .......................................................................... 93 Using Voice Recorder .............................................................................................. 95 vii Using MS Office Applications .................................................................................. 95 File Management ..................................................................................................... 96 Working With Folders ...................................................................................... 96 Playing Games ........................................................................................................ 96 Playing Bubble Breaker ................................................................................... 96 Playing Solitaire ............................................................................................... 97 Internet Explorer ...................................................................................................... 98 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards ............................................................................................... 99 Inserting a Storage Card .......................................................................................... 99 Removing a Storage Card ..................................................................................... 100 Viewing Content of a Storage Card ....................................................................... 100 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files .............................................................................. 101 Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 ................... 101 Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips .......................................................... 102 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task ........................................................... 104 Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List ...................................................... 104 Marking a Task as Completed ............................................................................... 104 16 Product Specifications System Specifications ............................................................................................ 105 Physical Specifications .......................................................................................... 106 Operating Environment .......................................................................................... 106 Regulatory Marks ................................................................................................... 107 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice ....................................................... 108 Modifications .................................................................................................. 108 Cables ............................................................................................................ 108 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) ...................................................................................... 109 Canadian Notice .................................................................................................... 109 Avis Canadien ........................................................................................................ 109 European Union Notice .......................................................................................... 110 viii Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices .............................................. 112 Battery Warning ..................................................................................................... 112 Battery Recycling ................................................................................................... 113 Battery Disposal ..................................................................................................... 113 Equipment Warning ............................................................................................... 114 Airline Travel Notice ............................................................................................... 114 Medical Electronic Equipment ............................................................................... 114 SAR Notice ............................................................................................................ 114 Wireless Notices .................................................................................................... 115 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice ................................................................... 116 Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice ........................................................... 116 Brazilian Notice .............................................................................................. 116 Singaporean Wireless Notice ........................................................................ 116 Japanese Notice .................................................................................................... 117 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices ..................................................................... 118 Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices ..................................................................... 118 Bluetooth Devices .......................................................................................... 118 Taiwan DGT Notice ............................................................................................... 119 Korean Notice ........................................................................................................ 119 Acoustics Warning ................................................................................................. 119 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? ........................... 120 I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this? ........................................ 120 I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do? ................................ 121 I am unable to hear voices clearly. How to resolve this? ....................................... 121 I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do? ........................................... 121 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call? ........................................... 121 Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times? ............................................. 121 Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times? .................................................. 122 Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen? .................................................................................................................. 122 I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do? ......................................... 122 I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do? ............................. 122 19 Care and Maintenance Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ ........................................................................ 123 Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ ................................................................... 123 Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ ................................................... 123 Guidelines for using accessories ........................................................................... 123 ix Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places .............................................. 124 x Q A P i e h t g n i r e t s g e R i 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Manage you profile and register your products Sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters After registering your HP iPAQ, you will receive an e-mail message regarding special offers and promotions. Take time now to register your HP iPAQ online at http://www.register.hp.com. If your mail or e-mail address needs to be updated after registration, visit http://www.register.hp.com and enter your user ID and registration password to edit your online profile at http://www.register.hp.com. Registering your HP iPAQ 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. Use this illustration to become more familiar with your new device. NOTE: Box contents vary by model. Box Contents

(1) HP iPAQ 2 Chapter 2 Box Contents Box Contents

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) 1100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with special software HP iPAQ documentation Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Plantronics, part number 430219, that is included with your HP iPAQ.

(6) AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with more than one interchangeable plug, which may not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your region.

(7) Mini-USB synchronization cable s t n e t n o C x o B Box Contents 3 3 Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all regions. Front Panel Components Component Function

(1) Display screen Use to view the contents on the screen. 4 Chapter 3 Components Component Function

(2) Right Softkey

(3) Power Button or End Key Press to launch Shortcuts from the Home screen. Press to end a phone call. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off.

(4) Back Key Press to go back to the previous screen.

(5) Keypad Use keys on the keypad to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus.

(6) 4Way Navigation Key Use to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Scroll up, down, left, or right by pressing down on the button in the direction you want to scroll. Release the button to stop the scrolling action.

(7) Home Key Press to go to the Home screen.

(8) Send Key Press to answer a call, lock your HP iPAQ, or start the speaker phone.

(9) Action Button Press to open an item or a program. Left Softkey Press to access programs from the Start menu. Earpiece Use to listen to phone calls, sounds, and notifications.

(1 0)

(1 1) Bottom Panel Components s t n e n o p m o C Bottom Panel Components 5 Component Function Charging/

Communications Port Use to connect to mini-USB synchronization cable. Microphone Use for phone conversations or to record notes. Strap Loop Use to carry your HP iPAQ.

(1

)

(2

)

(3

) Left and Right Side Components 6 Chapter 3 Components Component Function

(1) Volume key Press to increase or decrease the earpiece volume.

(2) Micro SD Slot Insert a Micro Secure Digital (SD) storage card with label side down for data storage.

(3) Headset Connector Plug the headphones into this connector for a private phone conversation or to listen to music. Make sure that the wired headset is firmly plugged into the headset connector.

(4) Voice Commander Button Press to launch the voice commander capability. s t n e n o p m o C Left and Right Side Components 7 Back Panel Components Component Function

(1

)

(2

)

(3

) Speaker Use the speakers to listen to music or as a speakerphone to converse when driving or otherwise occupied. Battery Cover Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or SIM card. HP Digital Camera Lens With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view the photo object on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. 8 Chapter 3 Components Setting Up Your HP iPAQ 4 Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 1. Slide the battery cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 9 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i 2. Remove the battery. If the battery is already installed, remove it before NOTE:

inserting the SIM card. The SIM card is provided by a mobile phone service provider. 3. Place the SIM card in the provided slot. NOTE: Be sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. 4. Slide the SIM card into the slot. 10 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 1. 2. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment and insert the battery. Slide the battery cover until it clicks into place. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 11 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i Step 3: Charge the battery CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, be sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Your HP iPAQ comes with a mini-USB synchronization cable, which must be used to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges may take longer. 1. Insert the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the mini-USB synchronization cable to the charging/

communications port on your HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. 12 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press End key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not switch on, attach an AC adapter to switch on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press the Power Button/End Key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the keypad to enter information. Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password You can keep your data more secure by requiring a password every time you turn on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Security > Device Lock. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, and select the amount of time from the list box that your HP iPAQ must be unused before the password is required. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use. Enter the password and confirm the password. Press Done. 4. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified amount of time, you will be prompted to enter your password. 3. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. Finding the Serial Number and Model Number Locate the Serial and Model numbers before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for in-warranty support. View the Serial Number and Model ID by pressing Start > More > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ 13 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i You can also find this information underneath the battery of your HP iPAQ. 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. Locate the label containing the Product ID and Serial Number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. Icon Status Missed call New voice mail New voice mail on line 1 New voice mail on line 2 New voice mail on line 1 and line 2 New e-mail or SMS Instant message received 14 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Icon Status Wi-Fi on Bluetooth SIM card fault Sync error Call forwarding active Roaming GPRS available Status Icons 15 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i Icon Status Phone line 1 Phone line 2 Ringer off Speakerphone on Battery level Battery level low Battery charging No battery or battery fault Signal strength 16 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Icon Status Voice call active Data call active GPRS in use Radio off Phone connection unavailable or network error Call on hold No SIM card installed Status Icons 17 P H r u o Y p U g n i t t e S Q A P i 5 Learning the Basics This chapter will help you get started with your HP iPAQ. You can learn basic functions such as entering text, knowing the Home screen, synchronization, and troubleshooting. Home Screen The Home screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. Along the top of the Home screen are the connectivity icons, the volume indicator, and the clock. The top of the Home screen displays the icons of the last ten programs you browsed. Use the Home screen to do the following:

Access all applications and settings by selecting the Start icon. Access your shortcuts by selecting Shortcuts. Battery Saving Tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life. Sounds - Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Press Start > Settings > Sounds and turn off any notifications that are unnecessary. Auto Turn Off the Backlight - Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Specify a short amount of time to wait before turning off the backlight. Set Backlight time out on battery to 5 to 10 seconds and Display time out to 30 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi - Always turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when you are not using them. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the mini-

USB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. 18 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i To check the battery power:

Press Start > Settings > Power Management. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ You can lock your HP iPAQ to prevent accidental key presses and unintentional phone calls while you carry your HP iPAQ. NOTE: When your device is locked, you can still receive phone call notifications and see appointment reminders. Press and hold the Send key. To lock your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Unlock appears in the Left Softkey position. To unlock your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Your HP iPAQ is unlocked and ready for use. Press the Left Softkey. Press iPAQ. Entering Text You can enter text and numbers on the HP iPAQ using the keypad. The HP iPAQ supports two input modes for entering text: Multipress and T9. The status indicator on the top of the display shows the input mode you are currently using. Changing Input Modes You can change the text mode to T9 or Multipress mode as follows:

1. Press and hold * until the status indicator for the input mode you want is shown at the top of the display screen. To change options in the Multipress or the T9 modes, for example, changes from abc to ABC, or from T9 to t9, press * and release. The following table shows the list of input mode status indicators. 2. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ 19 Indicator Mode abc Abc ABC t9 T9 T9 The Multipress text input mode, lowercase The Multipress text input mode, initial capital letters The Multipress text input mode, uppercase The T9 text input mode, lowercase The T9 text input mode, initial capital letters The T9 text input mode, uppercase TIP:

of a sentence is always capital. Entering Text in the Multipress Mode In the Multipress or the T9 text input mode, the first letter You can enter a letter in the Multipress mode by pressing the number key on which the letter appears. To enter the first letter on the number key, press the key once. To enter the second letter, press the key twice, and so on. The letter entered remains underlined until you complete the multiple keypress and the cursor moves to the next position. When you enter letters that are on the same number key, wait until the underline disappears before entering the next letter. This pause is called the Multipress time out, and you can adjust the length of the pause between multiple keypress. To change the Multipress time out:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Accessibility. Scroll to select the time for entering text in the multipress mode in Multipress time out box. Press Done. 3. 20 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Entering Text in the T9 Mode T9 is a predictive text entry mode that lets you enter a word using single keypress per letter. Entering Common Words To enter common words embedded in the T9 software:

1. Press a key indicating the first letter of the word you want to enter. A list of alternative words and letter combinations will be displayed on the screen. If the word you want is not displayed, continue by entering the second letter. The word choices update with each keypress. 2. Entering Novel Words i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i To enter the first letter of a word, press the required key once. You can coin words that are not recognized by T9. 1. 2. Use keypad to enter the rest of the word. 3. If the word you want to type is not present in the dictionary, press ADD WORD?. Enter the word in the Add My Word box and press Done. 4. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ stores the unrecognized word and includes it in the list of alternative word choices. When memory space for unrecognized words is filled, your HP iPAQ deletes the oldest words as it adds new words. TIP: You can also enter numbers and symbols in messages. Entering the Owner Information Enter your information so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Owner Information. Enter your personal information and press Done. Entering the Owner Information 21 Viewing the Operating System Information Press Start > Settings > More... > About. The operating system version is displayed at the top of the screen. TIP: You can also press Start > More > Accessories > Resource Manager to view System Information. Changing the Regional Settings The style in which language, locale, numbers, currency, dates, and times are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More... > Regional Settings. Select your region. The region you select determines the available options. To customize additional settings, select the appropriate options. Press Done. 3. 4. To change the language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display, follow steps 1 through 4 above, and then perform one of the following:

On the Language option, select the language display options. On the Locale option, select the locale display options. On the Date option, select the date display options. On the Time option, select the time display options. On the Number option, select the number display options. On the Currency option, select the currency display options. 22 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Adjusting the Volume Adjusting Ringer Volume You can also specify the sound you want to hear for a notification. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Select an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate option. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound for Reminders, New messages, New e-mail, Alarm clock, Warnings, and Keypad control. Press Done. 3. NOTE: Turning off notifications helps conserve battery power. Adjusting Speaker Volume i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Use the Volume key to increase or decrease the speaker volume. Changing the Power Management Settings Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Select Display time out. Select the length of time. Press Done. 1. 2. 3. 4. Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Select Backlight time out on battery or Backlight time out on AC. Select the length of time. Press Done. Adjusting the Volume 23 You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > More... > Power Management. Scroll and increase or decrease the brightness from Brightness list. Press Done. Installing and Removing Programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. 2. 3. Check the screen on your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the program installation. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Remove Programs. Select the programs you want to remove and then press Menu >

Remove. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you may increase available memory on the device. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be re-installed using ActiveSync. Open the Microsoft ActiveSync help on your computer, click Tools > Add/Remove Programs. Select the program to be added and click OK. Opening and Closing Programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program and press Start, then select the program you want from the list. 24 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i In most cases, programs automatically stop to get free needed memory. However, you can close programs manually, if you prefer. Press Start > More > Accessories > Task Manager. 1. From the Application list, select the application you want to close, and 2. press Menu > Kill, or pressMenu > Kill All to close all open applications. Customizing the HP iPAQ To get detailed information:

Press Start > Settings > More... > About. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network NOTE:

each device must have a unique name. If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, To change the device name:

1. 2. Navigate to select Device Name and enter a name in the Device Press Start > Settings > More... > Owner Information. Name box. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9, and cannot contain spaces. Press Done. Setting Alarms 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm > Alarm. Scroll to Alarm time and set the alarm time. Scroll and select the required option from the Alarm list. Press Done. Customizing the HP iPAQ 25 Creating and Assigning a Category In the Contacts and Tasks programs, you can use categories to help organize and group your contacts and tasks. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and press Edit >

Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, press Menu > Edit >

Categories. For a new item in Contacts and Tasks, select Categories. Enter the category name and then press Done. The new category is automatically assigned to the item. Press Done to return to the contact or task. 3. 4. NOTE: Categories are shared between your contacts and tasks. A category remains in the list of shared categories as long as it is assigned to at least one contact or task. Synchronization Microsoft ActiveSync software, located on the Getting Started CD, allows your HP iPAQ and your computer to communicate with each other. For synchronization to work properly, install Microsoft ActiveSync on your computer before you connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Use Microsoft ActiveSync to:

Synchronize information between your HP iPAQ and up to two computers or one server so that you have the latest information in all locations Change synchronization settings and the synchronization schedule Copy files between your device and computer Install applications on your HP iPAQ Synchronize links 26 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Send and receive e-mail Request meetings Synchronizing your HP iPAQ with your computer allows you to keep the same information (such as calendar, contacts, and e-mail messages) on both units, making it available when you work on your computer or when you take your HP iPAQ on the go. There are several ways to synchronize your HP iPAQ with your computer:

mini-USB synchronization cable To synchronize your HP iPAQ and your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable:

1. 2. Be sure ActiveSync 4.5 or later is installed on your computer. Plug the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into your computer. Bluetooth 3. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the universal sync connector on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. Synchronization begins automatically. CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC Adapter, check to be sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting them. 4. Click Next on the Synchronization Setup Wizard screen. 5. Perform one of the following:

By default, the check box is selected to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange Server. Clear this check box if you do not want to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange server and then click Next. Click Next if you want to synchronize directly with Microsoft Outlook. Synchronization 27 6. When the Synchronization Options screen displays, select the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer and then click Next. After your items have been synchronized, click Finish. The Synchronization Setup Wizard starts synchronizing the items you selected. 7. If ActiveSync does not begin the synchronization process, start it manually:

On your computer, open ActiveSync by selecting Start > All Programs >

Microsoft ActiveSync. Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection You can change the type of ActiveSync connection being used between your HP iPAQ and your computer to meet your specific needs. You should use USB Serial Sync Mode if you:

Are having general problems with the ActiveSync connection between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Need to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer while you are using a virtual private network (VPN) tunnel from your computer. Are running personal or company-enforced firewall software on your computer. You should use USB RNDIS Mode if you are transferring large files and do not have any connection issues between your HP iPAQ and your computer. To change the ActiveSync mode on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > More... > USB. Press Menu > ActiveSync Settings. Scroll and select RNDIS. Press Done to change the ActiveSync mode or press the Back button to return to Connections without saving the changes. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues This section gives information different synchronization troubleshooting issues and their solutions. The Web sites with additional information on troubleshooting is also included. 28 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Following is a list of symptoms that may indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync chimes sound (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. ActiveSync chimes sound, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The retrieving settings message appears on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. ActiveSync is searching for a connection but none occurs. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Confirm that you are running ActiveSync on your computer with a supported operating system (OS). To get more information about the supported OS versions, visit:

www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. The latest version of ActiveSync is at: www.microsoft.com. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall programs exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PC-

cillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite may block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the programs exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit: www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/help/activesync. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues 29 During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Be sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Place a check mark in the boxes under the computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-

based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your PC and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your PC. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel

> Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ 30 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics i s c s a B e h t g n n r a e L i is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues 31 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key You can use the Home key to return back to the Home screen from any application. You can do the following tasks using the Home key:

Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. The Quick List displays a list of available profile types and commands. Press the Home key and use the keypad to dial a number. Using the Back key The Back key is used to return to the previous screen. It is similar to moving a folder up in your computer. Using the 4-Way Navigation Key The 4-Way Navigation key is used to navigate the menu system, change feature settings, and play games. It is also used to scroll up and down the list to select a desired function. TIP: Down and up are your primary movements within menus and navigation through the contacts. Move left and right to change feature settings and edit text. Select a program icon at the top of the Home screen and then press theAction button to open the program. Select an item in the center of the Home screen and then press the Action button to access the settings associated with the selected item. Calling Features Subscribing to a Mobile Phone Service Provider Before you can use the phone feature on your HP iPAQ, you must subscribe to a mobile phone service provider. 32 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone The following features supported on your HP iPAQ must be activated by your mobile phone service provider:

Call Forwarding CSD - Circuit Switched Data GPRS - General Packet Radio Service International Dialing International Roaming Internet Access Text Message/MMS - Text Message Service/Multimedia Messaging Service voice mail VPN - Virtual Private Network For more information on these services, contact your mobile phone service provider. If you purchased your HP iPAQ from a mobile phone service provider, phone service may be activated at time of purchase or the mobile service provider may include activation instructions. If you purchased a prepaid SIM card to use with your HP iPAQ or if your service provider issued you a SIM card with a preset PIN, the following information is not applicable. You must call the service provider to activate your mobile phone service. Your carrier may require the following information to activate your service:

SIM Card Serial Number (printed on the box label or on the back of the SIM card) IMEI Number (printed on the HP iPAQ label under the removable battery) Your mobile phone service representative gives you your wireless phone number and helps you set up your service. Making a Call 1. Use keypad to enter the number you want to call. 2. Press the Send key to make the call. Calling Features 33 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i TIP: To call the person that you called last, press the Send key twice. Answering a Call To answer a call, press the Send key or press Answer on the on-screen phone keypad. When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call, the phone stops ringing and the caller may be sent to voice mail, depending on your mobile phone service provider. To disregard the call, press Ignore on the on-screen keypad or press the End Call key. Using Call Waiting Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are on another call. To turn on call waiting:

1. 2. 3. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting. Select the Provide call waiting notification check box. Press Done to save the settings. Press Answer to move the current phone call to Call Waiting. The incoming phone call on Call Waiting displays on the screen. Press the Send key to answer the incoming call or press Ignore on the on-screen keypad if you do not want to answer the call. Press Swap to toggle between the calls. 2. 3. Redialing a Number To redial the last number called from the Home screen:

Press the Send key twice. Calling a Contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. 34 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Making a Call from the Home Screen To make calls from the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to enter the contact name. 2. In case there are more than one contacts with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Press the Send key to make the call. 3. e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Making a Call from the Contacts You can select a persons name from your contacts list and press the Send key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact name. Press the Send key to place a call. TIP:

If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contacts name. Your HP iPAQ searches the entire contacts list to display the name. Changing the Default Number for a Contact The Work phone number is set as the default. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the default contact. Scroll and select to change default number. Making a Call to a Desired Phone Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact you want to call. Press the Action button to open the contact. Scroll to the number you want to call. Press the Send key to place the call. Calling Features 35 Making a Call Using Voice Dialing You can dial a phone number by speaking a name saved in your contacts list of the HP iPAQ's memory or by speaking numbers continuously. For more information refer to the chapter Voice Commands. Making Emergency Calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstances, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your HP iPAQs preprogrammed emergency number(s) may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. From the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to dial the local emergency number. 2. Press the Send key to place the call. Making Calls Using Speed Dials You can quickly dial phone numbers by assigning speed dial numbers. Press and hold one or two keys from the Home screen to make a speed dial call. You can choose speed dial entries from 2-99. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial setting is available only for a phone number stored in the Contacts of the phone memory. To create a speed dial shortcut:

1. 2. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the desired contact and press the Action button to open the contact. Scroll to the desired number and press Menu to open menu functions. 3. 36 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Select Add to Speed Dial. 4. 5. Use navigation keys to select a speed dial number from 2-99 under Keypad assignment. Press Done. 6. e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and e-mail addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

Press and hold the keypad number that you have assigned as a speed dial number. If the keypad assignment has two digits, press the first digit, then press and hold the second digit. Using voice mail From Home Screen:

Press and hold 1 to automatically call voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The voice mail shortcut may need to be set up by the user. Using the Handsfree Function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree mobile phone. 1. 2. Press Menu to open the menu options. Scroll to Speakerphone and press the Action button to turn the speaker on and the earpiece off. Monitoring Phone Use Call Timers contains the length of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use Call Timers to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan or estimate your monthly billing. Press Start > Call History > Menu > View Timers. Making Data Calls Use Data Connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS), dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and Wi-Fi connections Calling Features 37 so you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download e-mail, chat using MSN Messenger, or synchronize with the server without using wires. Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the data call by pressing End . This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your Information Technology (IT) manager for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring e-mail or wireless synchronizing with the server. For more information, refer to the chapter Connections. Muting a Call You can mute the microphone for the active call. The other party will not hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. During a call:

Press Mute. Putting a Call on Hold During a call, you can put the call on hold so you can call another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, press Menu and then select Hold. To switch between calls, press Swap. Making a Conference Call You can talk to two or more people simultaneously, using the conference call facility. 1. 2. Use the keypad to dial the first number. Press the Send key. 38 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Press the Send key. After you are connected, press Hold. 3. 4. 5. Dial the second number, and then press the Send key. 6. After you are connected, press Menu > Conference. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then press Menu > Conference. Making a Call From a Hyperlink Phone Number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an e-

mail or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an e-mail or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. 2. Scroll to the hyperlink phone number. Press the Action button to place the call. Dialing International Numbers You can make an international call from your HP iPAQ. To make an international call, enter a country code before the phone number. 1. On the Home screen, press and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign appears. 2. Enter the country code and phone number. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a Contact's phone number for faster dialing. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength After you insert an active SIM card into your HP iPAQ, your unit connects to your service provider's network. The signal strength icon indicates that you are connected to your service provider's network. A full strength connection is indicated by a full signal strength icon. The number of vertical bars in the icon diminish as the signal strength diminishes. No bars indicate no signal. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength 39 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number For security purposes, the SIM Personal Identification Number (PIN) protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Confirm your new pin in Confirm new PIN box. 6. Press Start > Settings > Security. Select Change PIN2. Enter your current pin in Old PIN box. Enter your new pin in New PIN box. Press Done. Using Call History Managing Calls Using Call History Call History provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. Press Start > Call History to view all of the calls in Call History. Press Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the Call History view. Press Menu > View Timers > Menu > Reset Timers, to reset the Recent Calls counter NOTE: The All Calls counter cannot be reset. Press Menu > Delete Lists to clear the entire Call History. Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager, you can easily turn on/off the functions of Wi-Fi connection, Bluetooth connection, and Phone features. 40 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i NOTE: When the Phone feature is turned off, you cannot receive or make a call, including an emergency calls. To receive and make a call, turn on the Phone feature and re-engage your phones RF capability. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Option Description All Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Phone. Wi-Fi Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Wi-Fi connection. Bluetoo th Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Bluetooth connection. Phone Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Phone features. Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn all wireless connections on/off at the same time:

1. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections >

Wireless Manager. Select All and press Action button to turn all wireless connections on/

off. 2. Flight Mode Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn all wireless connections on/off at the same time:

1. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections >

Wireless Manager. Select All and press Action button to turn all wireless connections on/

off. 2. Wireless Manager 41 Quick Launch Quick Launch is a simple way for you to open the Quick List that lets you turn off your HP iPAQ, manage wireless connections, change profiles, or lock your keypad. To access the Quick List:

1. 2. Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. Scroll to select from the list. Changing Phone Settings Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Scroll and select a ring tone from the Ring tone box. Press Done. Changing Service Settings Changing Phone Service Settings After your phone service is set up through your mobile phone service provider, you can change service settings on your HP iPAQ. You can block certain types of incoming and/or outgoing calls, forward incoming calls to a different phone number, be notified of incoming calls when you are already in a phone session, or let others know your identity when making calls. To change service settings on the HP iPAQ:

Press Start > Settings > Phone button. 1. 2. Select the service you want to change. 3. Make your changes and press Done. Auto Answer You can set time for automatic answering your calls when using your handsfree. 42 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i NOTE: These settings do not apply when your ring type is silent. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Phone More > Auto Answer. Select time for Auto Answer using navigation key. Press Done . Call Barring You can block incoming and/or outgoing calls on your HP iPAQ. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Barring. Call Forwarding 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Forwarding. Select the required condition from the list. Scroll and select Custom from the Forward voice calls to box. Enter the phone number to which the call must be forwarded in Phone number box. You can forward your calls to a different phone number for the following conditions:

Unconditional: forward the call without waiting for a reply. No Reply: if the call is not answered. Busy: if line is busy. Unavailable: if service is unavailable. Data Calls Fax Calls Call Options Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Options to change any of the available call options. Any key answer: access this facility by selecting the Any key answer check box. Show SIM contents: this check box is selected by default. voice mail number: you can enter/change your voice mail number here. Changing Service Settings 43 Internet voice mail number: you can enter/change your Internet voice mail number here. Text messages service center: it is set by the service provider. Country code: Enter your country code. Area code: Enter your area code. Call waiting Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting and select the Provide call waiting notification check box to access the call waiting facility. Caller ID You can request the network provider to display/hide your caller ID Changing Network Settings You can switch from one network to other as follows:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Phone. Select Networks to view your Current network, or Network selection to switch to a different network. TIP: You can select a different network by either automatically or manually searching the network. Profiles You can use profiles on your HP iPAQ to personalize the ringtones, ring volumes, and other settings according to your choice. Using profiles To select a profile:

1. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. TIP: You can also set profiles using Voice Commander. 2. Select any of the listed profiles and press Done to choose that profile. 44 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Editing profiles To edit a profile:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. Press Menu > Edit. Scroll and select to edit the following features in a profile:

Name Ring type Ring volume Alarm type Alarm volume Reminder type Reminder volume Notification type System sound volume Automatic Frequency Band Selection Your HP iPAQ has an integrated GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication)/GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)/EDGE(Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution) feature that supports four (850/900/1800/1900) different frequency bands for international roaming. When traveling, between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature changes the connection settings by generating an automatic search for frequency bands when your home bands are not available. This feature is the default setting on your HP iPAQ. To avoid problems After you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile HP iPAQ service provider's Web site to see if service is available where you are traveling. Verify your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Automatic Frequency Band Selection 45 e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device You can copy a contact from the SIM to the device as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Press Menu > Copy Contact. Press Menu > Edit to edit the contact information as needed. Press Done. ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and e-mail with Exchange/Outlook You can synchronize Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and E-mail with Exchange/Outlook 1. After your computer is in sync with your HP iPAQ, click Tools >

Options on the Microsoft ActiveSync dialog box. Select the check boxes which you want to synchronize. 2. 3. Click OK. Setting up E-mail Before sending and receiving e-mail messages, you may have to complete the e-mail account setup. You can send e-mail messages by synchronizing or connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider

(ISP) or a corporate network. You can only have one configurable Outlook E-

Mail at one time and therefore only synchronize one type of e-mail, either POP3 or computer. If you choose to synchronize your computer e-mail, it will wipe out your POP3 settings. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Options Description Your name Type your name E-mail address Enter your e-mail address Automatic setup If you check this feature, your HP iPAQ will obtain e-mail settings from the Internet. If you clear this feature, continue the following settings. 46 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone e n o h p t r a m S r u o Y g n s U i User name Enter your user name Password Domain (if necessary) Enter your password Enter your domain name, if necessary Save password Check this feature and you need not to enter in your password repeatedly before you send/receive e-mails. Server type Select either POP3 or IMAP4 Account name Enter in your account name Select The Internet Enter in your incoming mail server Check this feature, if necessary Enter in your outgoing mail server Check this feature, if necessary Use navigation keys to select messages you want to receive Use navigation keys to select an option Network Incoming Server Require SSL connection Outgoing Server Outgoing server requires authentication Download the following messages Connect automatically and check for messages Setting up E-mail 47 3. 1. 2. Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Exchange Server option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next again to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. Select the checkbox of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. 4. 5. 6. Voice Notes You can use Voice recorder to record audio clips. You can attach them as voice notes to e-mails, MMS, and meeting notes. For more information on voice notes refer chapter Notes. 48 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone 7 Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

Wi-Fi Press Start > Settings > Connections to access all these connection types. Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE Connecting to Intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter the URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Press Menu > Add and in In URL Pattern, enter the intranet URL. 3. If you use many URLs that share the same root company NOTE:

name, you can avoid entering them individually by entering

*.companyname.com. Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter an URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Select the intranet URL you want to change, and then press Menu >

Edit to edit. Press Delete to delete the URL. Setting Up Proxy Settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings Connecting to Intranet URLs 49 s n o i t c e n n o C during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your (ISP) or network administrator:

To set up proxy server settings:

1. 2. User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used Press Start > Settings > Connections > Proxy. Press Menu > Add to set up a new proxy server connection. Press Menu > Edit to edit a proxy server. Scroll to select the required option from the Connects from list. Scroll to select the The Internet option from the Connects to list. In the Proxy (name:port) box, enter the proxy server name and port. Scroll to select the required protocol option from the Type list. Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect 3. 4. 5. 6. You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To set up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Scroll to select your country from the Country list. Scroll to select your operator from the Operator list. Press Menu > Save to save your operator and country settings. Your HP iPAQ will automatically create a new GPRS connection using your operator settings. 50 Chapter 7 Connections Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 1. 2. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. If you are configuring a Socks proxy, select Socks 4 or Socks 5. If using Socks 5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Setting Up a VPN Connection User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server A Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

To set up a VPN server connection:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Select VPN and press the Action button. Enter the details given by the network administrator. To Edit details of an already existing VPN connection, scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Edit. NOTE: To delete an existing connection scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Delete. Wi-Fi With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 51 s n o i t c e n n o C device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLAN-enabled devices. With Wi-Fi you can:

Access the Internet Send and receive e-mail Access corporate network information Use Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) for secure remote access Use hotspots for wireless connectivity NOTE: Use of dial-up and wireless Internet, e-mail, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, may require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard Wi-Fi infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. Wi-Fi Terms Term Definition 802.11 standard An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Device-to-computer or ad-hoc A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-

to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. Domain Name System

(DNS) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. Encryption An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. 52 Chapter 7 Connections Term Hotspots Definition Public or private areas where you can access Wi-Fi service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. Infrastructure This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When you turn on the Wi-Fi radio, your HP iPAQ automatically detects Wi-Fi networks that are broadcasting their signal. If your Wi-Fi network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it manually. Before trying to connect to a Wi-Fi network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Scroll and select Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi on. After your HP iPAQ detects any existing Wi-Fi network, select the network you want to connect to and press Connect. Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi > New. Enter the network name. 1. 2. 3. Choose a network type. Select Internet to connect to the Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or select Private/Work Network to s n o i t c e n n o C Wi-Fi 53 4. connect to a company network. You should only choose Private/Work if the network requires a proxy server. Press Next to go to the Network Key screen. To use authentication, select the authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data encryption list. To automatically use a network key, select the The key is automatically provided check box. Else, enter the network key. NOTE: To delete a Wi-Fi connection, press Start > Settings >

Connections > Wi-Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Finding an IP Address You need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network to find the IP address of your connection 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > More > Wireless LAN. Press Menu > Advanced to find the IP address and network related details of your connection. Deleting a Wireless Network Connection You can delete networks you manually entered. However, if a network was automatically detected, you cannot delete it. To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. To delete a connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-

Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. 2. Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings 802.1x authentication settings provide a method to protect the network behind the access point from intruders as well as provide for dynamic keys and strengthen Wi-Fi encryption. Before performing these steps, determine if 54 Chapter 7 Connections authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. To manually enter information, press Start > Settings > Connections

> Wi-Fi. Select the network you want to configure and press Menu > Edit. Press Next twice to reach 802.1x screen. Press Use IEEE 802.1x network access control, and then select appropriate EAP type. 2. 3. Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant You can make voice calls using VoIP and IP PBX (Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. To make calls using IP PBX:

1. On the Home screen, scroll to Internet calling, which is off by default, and press the Action button. Scroll and select the required option from the Use Internet Calling box. You need to configure the Wi-Fi settings before you can use VoIP. 2. 3. 4. On the Home screen, the Internet Callingstatus changes to available or selected. 5. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the Send key. NOTE: On the Home, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service , it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration >

New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant 55 s n o i t c e n n o C 4. 5. 6. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider if available. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy checkbox if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. Enter the Voice Mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to connect to any computer or any other compatible device without using cables. Bluetooth Terms Term Authentication Authorization Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Bonding (Paired devices) Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Device address Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Device discovery Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Device ID Encryption Passkey Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. 56 Chapter 7 Connections Term Definition Personal Information Manager (PIM) Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks (for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Profiles Collection of Bluetooth settings. Service discovery Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Changing Bluetooth Settings 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Scroll and select the bluetooth connection for which you want to change the settings. Follow the on screen instructions and press Done. Connecting To Bluetooth Headset PLACEHOLDER FOR CONTENT- Require more information on how this feature functions. This feature will be available on select models only. Bluetooth Device Profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Object Exchange (OBEX) Protocol s n o i t c e n n o C Bluetooth 57 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. Object Push Protocol (OPP) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership You can create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. After you do this, the devices must have Bluetooth turned on but do not need to be discoverable for you to exchange information between them. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within 10 meters from each other. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. To create a new partnership. press Add New Device. Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. Select the name of the other device you want to create a partnership with and press Next. Specify a Passkey for authentication. Enter the same Passkey on the other device. Press Done. NOTE: Press Menu > Edit to rename a partnership. To end a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth to view all the partnerships you created on your HP iPAQ. Scroll and select the connection you want to delete. Press Menu >

Delete To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, press Yes. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric Passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey, and press Next. Enter the same 3. 58 Chapter 7 Connections 4. Passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a Passkey provides greater security. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Display Name. Press Done. 5. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is switched on and is in the discoverable mode. Making a Device Discoverable 1. 2. Press Start > Setting > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Turn On Visibility. NOTE:

Menu > Turn Off Visibility. If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, press Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Com Ports to set up a new port. Press Menu > New Outgoing Port. s n o i t c e n n o C NOTE: A new Outgoing Port is available only if there is atleast one Bluetooth device supporting serial (COM) connection. 5. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE: A port is in use if it cannot be created, if so then select a different numbered port. Bluetooth 59 6. 7. To limit communication on this COM port only to devices with which your HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure connection check box. Press Done. Ending a Connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via mini-USB synchronization cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. When connected via Bluetooth, press Start > Settings > Connections

> Bluetooth and then press Menu > Turn off Bluetooth to end a bluetooth connection When connected via Wi-Fi, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-

Fi and then press Menu > Turn off Wi-Fi to end a Wi-Fi connection GPRS/EDGE EDGE technology provides a connection to the mobile phone network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means with EDGE, your HP iPAQ can have faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Your HP iPAQ supports GPRS. If you want to HP iPAQ to support EDGE technologies, contact your service provider. Changing GPRS Network Settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS 60 Chapter 7 Connections connection information for you. You can change these settings or create your own network settings to your requirements. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > GPRS. If your operator name appears in the list, select the name and press Menu > Edit to edit the GPRS network settings. Editing Network Parameters CAUTION: Editing network parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. Connecting to a Laptop You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ and guides you during the connection process. If you have not done so, insert a GPRS-enabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You may also need to install the software drivers

(located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To Connect to a laptop using a USB data connection You may need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization data cable. Your computer may prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device 3.

(recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. 4. s n o i t c e n n o C Connecting to a Laptop 61 NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization data cable and press Connect. To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. Setting Up a Bluetooth Modem Connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 62 Chapter 7 Connections 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ to communicate with your computer and manage your pictures, data and music folders easily. To use ActiveSync over cable:

1. Connect the USB end of the synchronization cable to a USB port on your computer. 2. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the charging/

communications port on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. The connector fits only one way so do not force it. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. 3. When prompted, check the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Select the folder you want to synchronize. 4. 5. Click Explore on the computer ActiveSync dialog box to explore folders present on your HP iPAQ. Press Sync to synchronize the selected folders. 6. NOTE: To configure ActiveSync over GPRS, contact your corporate network administrator. To use ActiveSync over Bluetooth:

NOTE: For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB synchronization cable to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, press Start > More > ActiveSync. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth 63 s n o i t c e n n o C 3. 4. 5. Press Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and the computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Use ActiveSync Help to do this. Press Sync. After you finish synchronization, press Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. 64 Chapter 7 Connections 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to click and view photos. To Capture Photos Press Start > More > Camera. You can capture images and store them in your HP iPAQ or memory card. 1. 2. Use the 4way Navigation key to zoom in or out. 3. Use the 4way Navigation key to decrease or increase brightness. 4. Press the Action button to click a photo and automatically save it in File manager > My Documents > My Pictures. To View Photos Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. You can view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Navigate to a required folder or image. 3. 4. Navigate the folder to select a required image, and then press View. To Change Image Sizes Press the Action button once to display photo in full screen view. Press View to view a photo and press Open to open a folder. NOTE: The opened photo displays in the fit to view screen by default. Press the Action button once while in full screen view to display photo in actual view. Press the Action button once while in actual view to return back to fit to screen view. NOTE: You can create folders to manage your pictures. Press Menu > Edit > New Folder to create a new folder. a r e m a C Using the Digital Camera 65 Changing Camera Settings Changing Brightness Settings Press Menu > Brightness. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Changing Resolution Settings Press Menu > Resolution. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The resolution settings can be changed to:

176*144 352*288 320*240 640*480 1280*1024 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it may take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail, or Bluetooth. Changing Mode Settings Press Menu > Mode. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Mode settings can be changed to:

Timer - Set the self-timer to determine after how long you want the camera to click a photo after you press the shutter button. Burst - Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Changing Zoom Settings Press Menu > Zoom. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. 66 Chapter 8 Camera The Zoom settings can be changed to:

Zoom*1(default) Zoom*2 Zoom*3 Changing White Balance Settings Press Menu > White Balance. 1. 2. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The White Balance settings can be changed to:

Automatic (default) Night Sunlight Cloudy Fluorescent Incandescent NOTE: You can choose the preset depending on your shooting conditions. Configuring File settings Use your HP iPAQ File Settings to resize pictures for e-mail and to optimize for slideshow viewing. Press Start > More > Camera, and then press Menu > Options to change one or more of following options:

1. General The general settings can be changed to:

Medium Large (640*480) (default) a r e m a C Changing Camera Settings 67 Small Original The orientation of picture can be changed to:

Left Right 2. Slide Show Landscape Portrait The Slide Show settings can be changed to:

Select the Play Screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes check box to make your computer screensaver your HP iPAQ screensaver. 3. Camera Save Files To: Press the Action button and scroll to select the phone or storage card as the storage device. The default folder on the device is \My Documents\My Pictures\. Type Filename Prefix: Enter the text you want to add at the beginning of the filename. NOTE: You can save the filename prefix with any alpha numeric character and certain symbols. Still image compression level: Press the Action button and scroll to select the required option. NOTE: Higher-quality pictures look better, but are also larger in file size. Lower-quality pictures require less storage space and may take less time when sending by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail. 68 Chapter 8 Camera Using the Camcorder Recording Videos You can use the built-in camcorder in your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Camera. Press Menu > Video. Press theAction button to start recording. Press the Action button again to Stop recording. Configuring Video Format Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos, and then press Menu > Options

> Video. Select the Include audio when recording video files check box to record both audio and video. Set time limit to one of the following:

30 Seconds 15 Seconds No Limit NOTE: By default, all the pictures and videos are stored in \My Documents\My Pictures\. Transfer Images Using GPRS When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. 2. 3. Navigate to highlight Insert Picture area. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. a r e m a C Using the Camcorder 69 Press the Action button to open Pictures & Videos. 4. 5. Navigate to a required picture you want to add and press the Action button. Press Send. Using Bluetooth 6. You can do the following to transfer images from HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. Scroll and select a picture. Press Menu > Beam.... Select the device and press Beam. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. 70 Chapter 8 Camera i g n g a s s e M 9 Messaging You can use your HP iPAQ to keep in touch with your family and friends through messaging. Use your HP iPAQ to keep you updated on your e-mail messages. You can also keep a track of appointments and meetings using your HP iPAQ. Understanding Messages To send and receive e-mail messages using your HP iPAQ:

1. You can send and receive e-mail messages using the Direct Push Technology for Exchange server. You can send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account with Internet Service Provider (ISP). You can also send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account that you access using your Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection. You will need your account settings for VPN connection ( typically a work account ). 2. 3. You can also send pictures, video, and audio files on your phone and storage card using Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) on your HP iPAQ. You can have only pictures, or a combination of pictures and video, or audio that can be sent. Text can also be added to a MMS slide. Text messages can be sent using your HP iPAQ. Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using the phone number as the message address. NOTE: Multimedia Messaging Service, or Internet e-mail is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) e-mail server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your Internet Service Provider (ISP). You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Understanding Messages 71 Using Folders Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items Each Messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

The messages you receive and send through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each account. The way folders work vary by type:

1. ActiveSync: If you use an Outlook e-mail account, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your HP iPAQ. You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for synchronization. The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. You can read the messages while you are away from your computer. 2. MMS/Text Messages: If you use an MMS account or a text message 3. 4. account, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. POP3 account: If you use a POP3 account and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on your HP iPAQ and their copies on the e-mail server. When you connect, the e-mail server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on your HP iPAQ and deletes them from the e-mail server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except your HP iPAQ. IMAP4 account: If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your e-mail server, whether it is from your HP iPAQ or computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your e-mail 72 Chapter 9 Messaging i g n g a s s e M server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronizing E-Mail When you synchronize Outlook e-mail on a computer with your device, e-mail messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook e-mail account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it's deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days only and the first 2KB of each new message is downloaded. NOTE: Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your HP iPAQ via your service provider. Replying to E-mail using HP Voice Reply 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In your Outlook Inbox, scroll to the message you want to reply to and press the Action button to open the message. Press Menu > HP Voice Reply , and press Record to record your message. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required, and press Send. Synchronizing E-Mail 73 Composing E-mail using Voice Commander You can use the voice commander feature of your HP iPAQ to select the recipient of your e-mail. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose E-

Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. mail to (contact name) to launch the e-mail compose form with the recipient added. You can now compose your message by entering text or adding an attachment. 3. To compose an audio e-mail:

1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Audio Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. E-mail to (contact name) to start recording. 3. Record your message and press Stop 4. Say Confirm if you want to send the message or say Retry/Cancel. Setting up Messaging Accounts Text Messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message can be no longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters and contain no pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/

Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. 74 Chapter 9 Messaging MMS Messaging The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on your HP iPAQ. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless they request the change. i g n g a s s e M Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Exchange Server option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next. Press Next again to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. Select the checkbox of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. 1. 2. Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account.... Scroll and select Other option from the Your E-mail Source box. Press Next. Scroll and select Other (POP/IMAP) option from the Your E-mail Provider box. Press Next. Enter Your Name and E-mail Address and press Next. Press Done. 4. 5. 3. Receiving E-mail Attachments An attachment sent with an e-mail message or downloaded from the server appears below the subject of the message. Navigate to select the already Setting up Messaging Accounts 75 downloaded attachment or mark an attachment to download it the next time you send and receive e-mail. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 e-

mail account. If you have an Outlook e-mail account, do the following on ActiveSync dialog box :

1. Click Start > ActiveSync. 2. Click Options. 3. Click E-mail > Settings, and then select Include File Attachments check box. NOTE: To open a recorded message received as an attachment, scroll to the recorded message and press the Action button. If you have an IMAP4 e-mail account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Messaging. Press Menu > Tools > Options. Select the name of the IMAP4 account. Press Next until you reach Server information, and press Options. Press Next twice, and select Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. NOTE: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive e-mail. However, this feature does not work if TNEF is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. Receiving Meeting Requests If you receive your e-mail messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an e-mail server, the server 76 Chapter 9 Messaging must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time may be longer. Change e-mail download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. i g n g a s s e M After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. 2. Press the Action button to open the meeting request you received. Press Accept. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response is sent the next time that you synchronize or connect to your e-mail server, and your device calendar is updated. Creating or Changing a Signature 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Outlook E-mail Press Menu > Tools > Options. Press Signatures and scroll to select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. Select the Include when replying and forwarding check box if wanted. Enter a signature in the box. 5. 6. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each Messaging account. Setting up Messaging Accounts 77 Using Messaging Composing and Sending Messages To compose a New Text Message:

1. 2. Press Start > Messaging. In the message list, press Menu > Switch Accounts and select the account to compose a message. Press Menu > New and navigate to highlight the text area. Enter your text. 3. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. Scroll and select the Insert picture area. Press the Action button and navigate to add the required image. Select a recipient, enter a subject and then press Send. To send Pictures/Videos using MMS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To add preset or recorded audio (except when video already exists):

1. 2. Scroll and select the Insert Audio area. Press the Action button to open the Audio folder and navigate to select a required audio clip. Press Select to attach the audio clip. 3. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the TIP:

Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. Replying to or Forwarding a Message 1. 2. 3. Press the Action button to open the selected message, and then press Menu > Reply,Reply All, or Menu > Forward. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, press Menu

> My Text and navigate to select a required message. Press Send. 78 Chapter 9 Messaging NOTE: You can also use the voice commander to reply to any message. Use HP Voice Reply to reply using an audio e-mail message. Adding an Attachment to a Message 1. 2. In an open message, Press Menu > Insert and select the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. Select the file you want to attach or record a voice note. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. i g n g a s s e M Downloading Messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

1. To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook E-mail account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. 2. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in your Outlook E-mail messaging list, press Menu > Tools >

Options > Message, and select theKeep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an IMAP4 account, press Menu > Folders and navigate to select the Sent Items folder check box. Press Sync to synchronize this folder. Downloading Messages from a Server 1. On the message list, press Menu > Tools > Switch Accounts and select the account you want to use. Press Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and e-mail server are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the device 2. Using Messaging 79 Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. MSN Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft .NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft .NET Passport account, go to : http://www.passport.net.. After you have a account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Signing In and Out of Messenger Press Sign In after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter in your Sign-in name and password. Press Sign In. Press Start > More > Windows Live Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign in the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of Messenger:

Press Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which may result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session. User Accepts an incoming voice call. 80 Chapter 9 Messaging An outgoing voice call is placed. The device is turned off or moves out of range. Sending Instant Messages You can send Instant Messages from your MSN Messenger to people on your list. To send Instant Messages:

1. Select the person to whom you want to send an instant message and press Left Softkey. Enter in your message, and press Left Softkey. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Press Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Press Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Press Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you instant messages. i g n g a s s e M NOTE: Press Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Press Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by pressing Menu > Chats. Changing Your Status You can change your status on the MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Press the Action button to select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. MSN Messenger 81 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments You can also keep the track of appointments as per schedule in various views:

1. In Agenda View, you can keep track of appointments on the current date. In Week View, you can also keep track of appointments in a week. 2. In Month View, you can also keep track of appointments in a month. 3. NOTE: You can select the type of views you want from the Menu options. Creating an Appointment To create an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > New Appointment. Enter your schedule for an appointment. Press Done. Updating an Appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. Press Start > Calendar. Select and open the appointment, and then press Menu > Edit to make your changes. Press Done. 3. Canceling an Appointment When you delete an appointment in Calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment 82 Chapter 10 Calendar has not been synchronized with a computer, it is deleted only from your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Calendar. In Agenda view, select and open the appointment to delete. Press Menu > Delete. Press Yes to delete the appointment, or press No to keep it. NOTE: Calendar items can be deleted only from Agenda view or from an open calendar appointment. To delete from Week and Month views, open the appointment, and press Menu > Delete. TIP: You can also press Start > Calendar, select the appointment to delete and press Menu > Delete Appointment. Changing the Display of the Work Week You can customize your calendar so a work week starts on Sunday or Monday and continues from five to seven days. To change the display of the work week:

1. 2. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, select Sunday or Monday in the First day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, select 5-

day week, 6-day week, or 7-day week in the Week view box. 3. Press Done. Changing the Display of the Work Week 83 r a d n e a C l 11 Contacts Adding a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Press New to add a new contact. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact type. Enter the information. Press Done. TIP: Select Outlook Contact type to enter more information about contact. Deleting a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to delete. Press Menu > Delete Contact. Press Yes to delete the contact, or press No to keep it. Changing Contact Information Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit and make your changes. 1. 2. 3. 4. When finished, press Done. To include a nickname, job title, and more information, for an existing contact in the contact list, select the name of the contact, press Menu > Edit, update the information and press Done. Copying a Contact 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to copy. Press Menu > Copy Contact. 84 Chapter 11 Contacts Select the copy of the contact to make your changes. Press Menu > Edit. 4. 5. 6. Change the contact information as needed and press Done. NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Adding a Photo To add a photo to contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the photo you want to add. Select Camera and take a photo. Press Done. 6. Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select the address you want to send a message to and pressE-mail. Select the account you want to send the message from. Enter your message and press Send. s t c a t n o C NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, select the To, Cc, or Bcc line, and press Menu > Add Recipient. Select the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address. Adding a Photo 85 Sending a Text Message to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select Send text messageand press Text. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, press Menu

> My Text and select a desired message. Press Send. 5. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, press Menu > Message Options. Select the Request delivery notifications check box and press Done. Adding and Removing a Picture To add a picture to contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the picture you want to add. Select Camera and take a picture. Press Done. 6. To remove a picture from contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Press Menu > Remove Picture. Press Yes to remove the picture, or press No to keep it. 86 Chapter 11 Contacts Working with the Contact List There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. Here are a few tips on how to make it work for you. 1. 2. Press Start > Contacts. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Name view. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, press Menu > View By > Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, press the contact. From there you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, press and hold the contact. s t c a t n o C Working with the Contact List 87 12 Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3s using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS office applications to view presentations, Excel sheets and word documents. Using HP Applications HP Voice Reply You can use the HP Voice Reply feature on your HP iPAQ to record a message instead of pressing buttons for a text response and save your time. 1. In your Outlook Inbox, scroll to the message you want to reply to and press the Action button to open the message. Press Menu > HP Voice Reply , and press Record to record your message. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. Enter any short text message if required, and press Send. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: Ensure that you have adequate space on your HP iPAQ to avoid any kind of alerts related to storage space while recording a voice reply. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, 88 Chapter 12 Applications modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information - Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network - Wireless Network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy - Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. E-mail - E-mail settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet e-mail accounts. Exchange Server - Exchange Server is used to access e-mail, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to sync directly with your organizations Exchange Server. VoIP - VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) routes voice conversations using an IP-based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. Speed Dial - HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider may also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite - Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish - In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. Using HP Applications 89 s n o i t a c i l p p A Voice Commands Use your voice to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the Voice Commander button to launch the voice commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command to the microphone. NOTE: You can also launch the voice commander by pressing the hookswitch on our HP iPAQ headset. Call a contact saved in the contact list Find a contact saved in the contact list To call numbers not stored in contact list To play, pause, or/and resume music To play a existing music file You can call a contact saved in contact list by speaking Call followed by his name or by speaking his 7 digit or 10 digit number without a pause. You can find a contact saved in contact list by speaking Find followed by the name of the contact. Say Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number. Say Redial to redial the number and say Callback to call back the last dialled number. You can play music, pause it, and resume by speaking Play Music/Pause/Resume command. Speak Play followed by the name of the music file. To Play the previous or the next song in the playlist You can play previous or next song in the playlist by speaking Previous/Next command. To open an application View appointments You can open any applications available in your phone by speakingStart followed by the application name. You can speak <Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments to list the appointments for the day, next day or the present week. 90 Chapter 12 Applications Read messages, e-mails, check call history You can view inbox messages, e-mail, or call history by speaking Read<SMS/e-mail> / Call history. View time View the different set of commands To close Voice Commander application To compose e-mail To compose an audio e-mail To change profiles To dial a number using speed dial To record a audio note To see all reminders To schedule a call You can view the time by speaking What is the time. You can speak what can I say? to view a list of commands that can be used. Say Goodbye command to close the Voice Commander application. Say Compose E-mail To (Contact) to launch a e-mail compose form with recipient already added in it. Say Compose Audio E-mail to (Contact) to start recording an audio message and then send it to the recipient Say Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile. Say Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number. Say Start Recording to open the voice recorder ad start recording. Say Reminder to see all the reminders for the day. Say Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact. HP iPAQ Shortcuts Using HP iPAQ Shortcuts HP iPAQ Shortcuts is a quicker way to access an application with single key press. Using HP Applications 91 s n o i t a c i l p p A To use HP iPAQ Shortcuts:

1. On the Home screen, press Shortcuts. 2. Navigate to the application you want to use. 3. Press the Action button or Select to select the application. Editing HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can change the default shortcuts and assign different applications. To change a shortcut:

1. Scroll to the function you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and press Menu > Edit. In the Target navigate to select Tasks, Programs, Web links, or Files. Press the Action button to create the shortcut. 2. 3. Task Manager 1. Press Start > Accessories > Task Manager. TIP: You can also press Start > Accessories > Resource Manager > Menu > Task Manager. 2. From the Application list, select the program you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Kill All to close all open programs. HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use HP iPAQ DataConnect to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To configure GPRS using HP iPAQ Data Connect:

1. 2. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process of setting up GPRS using your HP iPAQ DataConnect . HP iPAQ Tips Use the HP iPAQ Tips to help you perform functions on your HP iPAQ at a faster rate. A tip is displayed every time you switch on your HP iPAQ. Use 92 Chapter 12 Applications these tips to make maximum use of your phone. By default, each tip will displayed on the screen for 30 seconds. You can either choose to read all tips or exit the application. After the first HP iPAQ Tip is displayed, press Next to display the next screen. Press Menu > Exit to close the application. HP QuickStart Tour HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour provides basic information about the tasks and activities you can perform using your HP iPAQ. You can try each feature as you go through this tutorial. You can return to the same position in this QuickStart Tour simply by selecting Start > More > HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour. Using Windows Media MP3 Player Press Start > More > Windows Media to open the windows media player. Using Windows Media 10 series, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. It supports three different display screens:

Play screen (default) To display the Play screen, navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder and press the Action button. Now Playing screen To display the Now Playing screen, press Now Playing from the Play screen. Library screen To display the Library screen, press Menu > Library

> My Device (HP iPAQ) or Memory. NOTE: Press Menu > Update Library to search for folders on your HP iPAQ or memory card and add the folders to the Library screen. To create a new playlist:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open File. 2. Navigate to the required media file, and press Menu > Queue Up to add the media file in the now playing screen. Using Windows Media MP3 Player 93 s n o i t a c i l p p A 3. 4. Press Menu > Now Playing to go to the Now Playing screen. Press Menu > Save Playlist to save the list of media files on the Now Playing screen. NOTE: Navigate the Library screen to select the playlist you want to delete, and then press Menu > Delete From Library. To play a streaming media file on the web:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open URL. 2. To play media files:

1. Navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder, and press the Enter the URL for streaming file, and press OK. Action button. 2. On the play screen, press Menu > Play/Pause to play or pause the media file. Press Menu > Stop to stop the currently playing media file. 3. NOTE: On the Play and Now Playing screen, press Menu >

Shuffle/Repeat to play all the files in the playlist randomly or repeatedly. You can play your media files by using the voice commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music/

Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ.

(Media File Name) to play the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the Voice Commander button and say Pause/

Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. 94 Chapter 12 Applications Using Voice Recorder You can use the voice recording feature of your HP iPAQ to record voice clips, and use them as a voice note in your e-mails or MMSs. To record voice clips:

1. 2. Press Start > More > Voice Recorder. Press Record to start recording a voice clip. Press Menu > Play to play the recorded voice clip. To delete or rename the voice clip, press Menu > Rename/Delete. Press Menu > Set as Ringtone to set the voice clip as your HP iPAQ ringtone. 3. 4. Using MS Office Applications To use MS Excel applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. file. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. 3. 4. To use MS Word applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. file. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. 3. 4. To use MS PowerPoint applications 1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the Press Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. file. Using Voice Recorder 95 s n o i t a c i l p p A 3. 4. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. File Management Press Start > More > File Manager, to explore the file manager. To view your files and folders use:

Tree View: Displays the entire file structure in your phone memory. The functions in Tree View primarily focus on folder management. List View: Displays the selected folder and its sub-folders and files. The functions in List View are basically file-oriented. Working With Folders To delete a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be deleted, and press Menu >File > Delete. 2. Press Yes to delete. To copy/paste a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be copied, and press Menu > File > Copy To. 2. Navigate the List view to select the destination folder, and press Menu

> Paste to paste the file. To create shortcut:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file for which you want to create a shortcut, and press Menu > File > Create Shortcut. 2. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the destination folder to save the shortcut in and press Done. Playing Games Playing Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer the balls you leave behind, more the scores you get. 96 Chapter 12 Applications To start a new game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. Press Menu > New to open a new game of bubble breaker. Press Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. To edit the settings for the game, press Menu > Options. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, press Menu > Undo. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. Press Menu > New to open a new game of bubble breaker. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Press the Action button twice to delete the balls from the screen. 4. Playing Solitaire The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. Press Menu > More > Games > Solitaire. Press the number or character above the card stack displaying the card you want to move, and press the number or character above the card stack to which you want to move the card. 3. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. NOTE: Press the Navigation Key up to move a card to one of the four card stacks on the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 4. When you have made all the available plays, press Draw to turn over cards. Playing Games 97 s n o i t a c i l p p A Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer mobile favorites. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. 2. Navigate the favorite list and press Go to open the desired link. 3. To open a link using homepage:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer mobile favorites. Press Start > Homepage to go the homepage. Enter the link you want to connect to and press the Action button. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. Press Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and press Menu

> Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Press Menu > History to display the history. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: Press Menu > Options to change General, Connections, and Memory settings. 98 Chapter 12 Applications s d r a C e g a r o t S 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards must be purchased separately and are not included with your HP iPAQ. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/go/

ipaqaccessories. Inserting a Storage Card To insert a storage card into the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Locate the storage card slot at the side of your HP iPAQ. 2. Open the protective cover. 3. Insert the storage card into the storage card slot and push the connection edge of the card firmly into the storage card slot. NOTE:

manufacturer's instructions to install it. If your storage card is not recognized, follow the card If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Be sure the label is facing below. Be sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Be sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Using Storage Cards 99 Removing a Storage Card To remove a Micro Secure Digital (micro-SD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. Remove the card from the storage card slot by lightly pushing on the card to unlock it. 3. When the card disengages and pops out, pull it from the storage card slot. Viewing Content of a Storage Card Press Start > File Manager. Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. 2. Navigate to select the Memory Card folder to see a list of files and folders. If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Be sure you have firmly pushed the storage card into the storage slot. Be sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. 100 Chapter 13 Storage Cards g n i z i n o r h c n y S 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files You can copy (transfer) files to and from your computer using Explore in ActiveSync and Windows Explorer. To copy (transfer) files:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer via the mini-USB synchronization cable. Select Explore. 2. On your computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. 4. Double-click Mobile Device. 5. On your computer, right-click the Start menu, and select Explore. 6. Locate the file to be moved. NOTE: You cannot copy pre-installed files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. Move your files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents), so the programs on your device can locate them. Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 If you used a Palm Operating System (OS) based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0. Copying (or Transferring) Files 101 2. To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6.0:

1. Make sure you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or a higher version installed on your computer. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CD-ROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default e-mail program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for E-mail, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall HotSync from your computer. Click Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computer's CD-ROM drive and follow the on-screen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 5. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Do this 102 Chapter 14 Synchronizing Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device power-down timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. g n i z i n o r h c n y S Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips 103 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task Press Start > Tasks. Select and open the task you want to set start and due dates for. NOTE: To create a new task, press Start > Tasks > Menu >

New Task. Press Edit and do one or both of the following:

Press Done. Select Start date to enter a start date for the task. Select Due date to enter a due date for the task. Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List Press Start > Tasks. Press Menu > Options. Select the Show start and due dates check box. Press Done. Marking a Task as Completed To mark a task as completed:

1. 2. Press Start > Tasks. In the task list, select the task you want to complete and press Complete to mark a check box as completed. To mark an open task as completed:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select and open the task you want to complete. Press Edit. In the Status box, select the Completed check box. Press Done. 104 Chapter 15 Tasks 16 Product Specifications System Specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System tab > Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display LED Backlight Secure Digital (SD) Slot Wired Stereo Headset Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth Description TI OMAP 850 Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Smartphone Edition 128MB/64MB (NAND, ROM/RAM) 5 W maximum output AC adapter with detachable heads, voltage range 100 to 240 V switching, input current 0.2 A AC maximum, input frequency 50 to 60 Hz, output voltage 5 V DC, output current 1 A TFT Micro-reflective, 176x220 2.0, 65K Colors Multi-level brightness adjustment with power save mode Supports micro SD memory 3.5mm jack with dual earbud style headset Included in box Internal, Quad-Band antenna Speaker, and one 3.5mm stereo headset jack 1,100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 1.2, Profiles: Headset/ Hand-free/

OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 meter s n o i t a c i f i c e p S t c u d o r P System Specifications 105 System Feature Description range (approximately 33 feet) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices Wi-Fi Wi-Fi 802.11 b/g Physical Specifications Length Width Depth Weight US 4.65 in 2.8 in 0.71 in 5.8 oz Operating Environment Metric 107.0 mm 48.6 mm 16.3 mm 102 g US Metric Temperature Operating 32 to 104F 0 to 40C Non-operating 4 to 140F 20 to 60C Relative Humidity Operating 85 % RH Non-operating 0%

Maximum Altitude Operating Non-operating 0 - 15,000ft 0 - 40,000ft 85 % RH 0%

0 - 4572m 0 - 12192m 106 Chapter 16 Product Specifications Regulatory Marks Electrical Safety FCC Class B, UL or CSA NRTL, CE [FM]

C-UL, NOM[FM] C-UL s n o i t a c i f i c e p S t c u d o r P Regulatory Marks 107 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 108 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Canadian Notice 109 European Union Notice Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-

marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, 110 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. European Union Notice 111 Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band

(channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-

MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 112 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. http://www.hp.com Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Battery Recycling 113 Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of 114 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.XXX W/kg. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the body is 0.XXX W/kg.

* The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram

(W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. FCC SAR The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram(W/kg). The highest SAR value for the device as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.792 W/kg for GSM Head SAR, 0.644 W/kg for PCS Head SAR, and 0.562 W/kg for WLAN Head SAR, and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.23 W/kg for GSM Body SAR, 0.908 W/kg for PCS Body SAR, and 0.094 W/kg for WLAN Body SAR. (Body-worn measurements differ among device models, depending upon available enhancements and FCC requirements.) Wireless Notices R In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 1.5cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. 116 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELECs standards EN50360 and EN50361 which use the limit of 2 Watts per kilogram (W/

kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested is as follows:

GSM900: 0.158 W/kg (10g) DCS1800: 0.387 W/kg (10g) Japanese Notice Japanese Notice 117 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices 118 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices s e c i t o N y r o t a u g e R l Taiwan DGT Notice Korean Notice Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage your hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. HP recommends to use the headset delivered with your HP iPAQ (part number 430219, manufactured by Plantronics), that is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Taiwan DGT Notice 119 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ appears to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of network signal in good condition?

Is network setup properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. 120 Chapter 18 Frequently Asked Questions d e k s A y l t n e u q e r F s n o i t s e u Q I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How to resolve this?

You may be unable to hear to voices clearly if you turn on the in-call mute function. Turn off this function to be able to listen to voices clearly. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe for these services from your service operator. Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

121 If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

It is recommended to have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ for the device to operate efficiently. To check the free memory space, press Start > Settings > More... > About. Remember to delete or transfer old messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Home screen layout error message if you did not select any Home screen layout. To correct this, press Start > Settings > Home Screen and select a layout for the Home screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. 122 Chapter 18 Frequently Asked Questions 19 Care and Maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-circuit the battery and result in danger. Take a backup of SMS messages on your HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Guidelines for using accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ 123 i e c n a n e t n a M d n a e r a C Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. 124 Chapter 19 Care and Maintenance

 

 

HP iPAQ Product Guide Trademark and Copyright Information Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. http://www.hp.com Microsoft, Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP iPAQ Products are Powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This product's real time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this can document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. First Edition April 2007 Document Part Number: 446232001 Registering the iPAQ

Registering your HP iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products Manage your profile Sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters After registering your HP iPAQ, you will receive an email message regarding special offers and promotions. Take time now to register your HP iPAQ online at http://www.register.hp.com. If your mail or email address needs to be updated after registration, visit http://www.register.hp.com and enter your user ID and registration password to edit your online profile at http://www.register.hp.com. Box Contents

Box Contents Box Contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. NOTE: Box contents vary by model. HP iPAQ Voice Messenger 1100 mAh LiIon removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with special software HP iPAQ documentation

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Merry, part number EMC220X00, that is included with your HP iPAQ.

(6) AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with more than one interchangeable plug, which may not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your region. Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times.

(7) MiniUSB synchronization cable Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all regions.

Front Panel Components

Bottom Panel Components

Left and Right Side Components

Back Panel Components Front Panel Components

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11) Component

(1) Function Use to view the contents on the screen. Press to launch HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Home screen. Press to end a phone call. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off. Display Screen Right Softkey Power Button or End Key Back Key Keypad 4Way Navigation Key Home Key Press to go to the Home screen. Send Key Action Button Left Softkey Earpiece Press to go back to the previous screen. Use keys on the keypad to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus. Use to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Scroll up, down, left, or right by pressing down on the button in the direction you want to scroll. Release the button to stop the scrolling action. Press to answer a call, lock your HP iPAQ, or start the speakerphone. Press to open an item or a program. Press to access programs from the Start menu. Use to listen to phone calls, sounds, and notifications. Bottom Panel Components Component

(1) Charging/Communications Port

(2) Microphone

(3) Strap Loop Function Use to connect the miniUSB synchronization and charging cable. Use for phone conversations or to record notes. Use to attach accessories to carry your HP iPAQ. Left and Right Side Components Component

(1) Volume Button

(2) MicroSD Slot

(3) Headset Connector

(4) Voice Commander Button Function Press to increase or decrease the earpiece volume. Insert a Micro Secure Digital (MicroSD) storage card with the label side down for data storage. Plug the headphones into this connector for a private phone conversation or to listen to music. Make sure that the wired headset is firmly plugged into the headset connector. Press to launch the Voice Commander. Back Panel Components Function Use the speakers to listen to music or as a speakerphone to converse when driving or otherwise occupied. Press the release button on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ to remove the back cover. Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or the SIM card. With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view it on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. Component

(1) Speaker

(2) Release Button

(3) Battery Cover

(4) HP Digital Camera Lens Setting Up Your HP iPAQ

Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card

Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover

Step 3: Charge the battery

Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ

Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password

Finding the Serial and Model Number

Status Icons Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card 1. Press the release button on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. 2. Remove the battery. NOTE:

If the battery is already installed, remove it before inserting the SIM card. The SIM card is provided by a mobile phone service provider. 3. Place the SIM card in the provided slot. NOTE: Make sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. 4. Slide the SIM card into the slot. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 1. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment, and insert the battery. 2. Place the battery cover down and slide up until it clicks into place. Step 3: Charge the battery CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, Make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Your HP iPAQ comes with a miniUSB synchronization cable, which must be used to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges may take longer. Insert the USB end of the miniUSB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the miniUSB synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on your HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the miniUSB synchronization cable. NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press the End key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not switch on, attach an AC adapter to switch on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press the Power button or End key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the keypad to enter information. Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password You can secure the data on your HP iPAQ by setting a password. Each time you turn on your HP iPAQ, you will be prompted to enter the password. To set a password:

1. Press Start > Settings > Security > Device Lock. 2. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, and select the time that your HP iPAQ must be unused before you are prompted for a password. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use. Enter the password and then confirm the password. 3. 4. Press Done. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified period of time, you are prompted to enter your password. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. Finding the Serial and Model Number Locate the serial and model number of your HP iPAQ before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for inwarranty support. View the serial and model ID by pressing Start > More > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. You can also find this information below the battery of your HP iPAQ:

To locate the serial and model number:

1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. Locate the label containing the product ID and serial number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. Icon Status Missed call Voice call active No SIM card installed New Voice mail Instant message received Icon Status Call forwarding active Call on hold SIM card fault New e-mail or SMS Battery level Battery level low No battery or battery fault Ringer off Wi-Fi on Roaming GPRS available in roaming Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution (EDGE) available EDGE in use Phone connection unavailable or network error Learning the Basics Battery charging Sync error Speaker phone on Bluetooth General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS) available GPRS in use EDGE available in roaming Signal strength Radio off Get started with your HP iPAQ by learning basic functions such as entering text, knowing the Home screen, synchronization, and troubleshooting.

Home Screen

Battery Saving Tips

Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ

Entering Text

Entering the Owner Information

Viewing the Operating System Information

Changing the Regional Settings

Adjusting the Volume

Changing the Power Management Settings

Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight

Installing and Removing Programs

Opening and Closing Programs

Customizing the HP iPAQ

Setting Alarms

Creating and Assigning a Category

Synchronization

Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection

Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues Home Screen The Home screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. From the Home screen, scroll and select the cellular carrier and WiFi connection status display module to open the Wireless Manager. Next, press All to turn all wireless connections on/off. At the top of the Home screen are the connectivity icons, the volume indicator, and the clock. The top of the Home screen also displays the icons of the last ten programs you used so that you can quickly recall them. Use the Home screen to do the following:

Access all applications and settings by pressing Start. Access your shortcuts by selecting HP iPAQ Shortcuts. Battery Saving Tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life:

Sounds Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Press Start >

Settings > Sounds and turn off any notifications that are unnecessary. Auto Turn Off the Backlight Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. Specify a short amount of time to wait before turning off the backlight. Set Backlight time out on battery to 5 to 10 seconds and Display time out to 30 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and WiFi Always turn off Bluetooth and WiFi when not in use. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the miniUSB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. To check the battery power, press Start > Settings > Power Management. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ You can lock your HP iPAQ to prevent accidental key presses and unintentional phone calls while you carry your device. NOTE: When your device is locked, you can still receive phone call notifications and see appointment reminders. To lock your HP iPAQ, press and hold the Send key. To unlock your HP iPAQ, press Unlock and *. Your HP iPAQ is unlocked and ready for use. Entering Text You can enter text and numbers on the HP iPAQ using the keypad. The HP iPAQ supports two input modes for entering text: Multipress and T9. The status indicator on the top of the display screen shows the input mode that is currently in use. This section provides information about the following topics:

Changing Input Modes

Entering Text in the Multipress Mode

Entering Text in the T9 Mode Changing Input Modes You can change the text mode to Multipress or T9 as follows:

1. Press and hold * until the status indicator for the input mode you want is shown at the top of the display screen. To change options in the Multipress or T9 modes, for example, changes from abc to ABC, or from T9 to t9, press * and release. 2. The following table shows the list of input mode status indicators:

Indicator abc Abc ABC t9 T9 T9 Mode The Multipress text input mode, lowercase The Multipress text input mode, initial capital letters The Multipress text input mode, uppercase The T9 text input mode, lowercase The T9 text input mode, initial capital letters The T9 text input mode, uppercase TIP:

In the Multipress or T9 text input mode, the first letter of a sentence is always in uppercasel. Entering Text in the Multipress Mode 1. You can enter a letter in the Multipress mode by pressing the number key on which the letter appears. 2. To enter the first letter on the number key, press the key once. 3. To enter the second letter press the key twice, and so on. 4. The letter entered remains underlined until you complete multiple keypresses and the cursor moves to the next position. When you enter letters that are on the same number key, wait until the underline disappears before entering the next letter. This pause is called the Multipress time out, and you can adjust the length of the pause between multiple keypresses. To change the Multipress time out:

1. Press Start > Settings > More > Accessibility. 2. Scroll to select the time for entering text in the Multipress mode in Multipress time out box. 3. Press Done. Entering Text in the T9 Mode T9 is a predictive text entry mode that lets you enter a word using a single keypress per letter. This section provides information about the following topics:

Entering Common Words

Entering New Words Entering Common Words To enter common words embedded in the T9 software:

1. Press a key indicating the first letter of the word you want to enter. A list of alternative words and letter combinations will be displayed on the screen. If the word you want is not displayed, continue by entering the second letter. The word choices are updated with each keypress. 2. Entering New Words You can add new words that are not recognized by T9. 1. To enter the first letter of a word, press the required key once. 2. Use the keypad to enter the rest of the word. 3. 4. Enter the word in the Add My Word box and press Done. If the word you want to type is not present in the dictionary, press ADD WORD?. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ stores the unrecognized word and includes it in the list of alternative word choices. When memory space for unrecognized words is filled, your HP iPAQ deletes oldest words as it adds new words. TIP: You can also enter numbers and symbols in messages. Entering the Owner Information Enter your information so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. Press Start > Settings > More > Owner Information. 2. Enter your personal information and press Done. Viewing the Operating System Information Press Start > Settings > More > About. TIP: You can also press Start > More > Accessories > Resource Manager to view System Information. Changing the Regional Settings The style in which language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. Press Start > Settings > More > Regional Settings. 2. Select your region. The region you select determines the available options. 3. To customize additional settings, select the appropriate options. 4. Press Done. To change the language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display, follow steps 1 through 4 above, and then perform one of the following:

From the Language list, select the language. From the Locale list, select the locale. From the Short date style/Long date style lists, select the date format. From the Time format list, select the time display option. From the Positive number/Negative number lists, select the number display options. From the Positive currency/Negative currency lists, select the currency display options. Adjusting the Volume This section provides information about the following topics:

Setting the Ringtone

Adjusting Speaker Volume Setting the Ringtone You can also specify the sound you want to hear for any notification. 1. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. 2. Select an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate option. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound for Reminders, New text messages, Ring tone, Internet call ring tone, New voice message, New instant message, SIM toolkit messages, Exclamation, Question, New channel message, New email, Alarm clock, Warnings, and Keypad control. 3. Press Done. NOTE: Turning off notifications helps conserve battery power. Adjusting Speaker Volume Use the Volume button to increase or decrease the speaker volume. Changing the Power Management Settings 1. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. 2. Select Display time out. 3. Select the length of time. 4. Press Done. Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. 2. Select Backlight time out on battery or Backlight time out on AC. 3. Select the length of time. 4. Press Done. You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. 2. Scroll and increase or decrease the brightness from Brightness list. 3. Press Done. Installing and Removing Programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the miniUSB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. 2. Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. 3. Check the screen of your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the program installation. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. Press Start > Settings > Remove Programs. 2. Select the programs you want to remove and then press Menu > Remove. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you may increase available memory on the device. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be reinstalled using Microsoft ActiveSync. Open the ActiveSync help on your computer, click Tools > Add/Remove Programs. Select the program to be added and click OK. Opening and Closing Programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program, press Start and then select the program you want from the list. In most cases, programs automatically stop to free required memory space. However, you can close programs manually, if you prefer. 1. Press Start > More > Accessories > Task Manager. 2. From the Application list, select the application you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Menu > Kill All to close all open applications. Customizing the HP iPAQ To get detailed information:

Press Start > Settings > More > About. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network NOTE:

If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a unique name. To change the device name:

1. Press Start > Settings > More > Owner Information. 2. Enter a name in the Device Name box. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9. 3. Press Done. Setting Alarms 1. Press Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm > Alarm. 2. Scroll to Alarm time and set the alarm time. 3. Scroll and select the required option from the Alarm list. 4. Press Done. Creating and Assigning a Category In the Contacts and Tasks programs, you can use categories to help organize and group your contacts and tasks. 1. From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. 2. Do one of the following:

For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and press Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, press Menu > Edit > Categories. For a new item in Contacts and Tasks, select Categories. 3. Enter the category name and then press Done. The new category is automatically assigned to the item. 4. Press Done to return to the contact or task. NOTE: Categories are shared between your contacts and tasks. A category remains in the list of shared categories as long as it is assigned to at least one contact or task. Synchronization Microsoft ActiveSync, located on the Getting Started CD, allows your HP iPAQ and your computer to communicate with each other. For synchronization to work properly, install Microsoft ActiveSync on your computer before you connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Use Microsoft ActiveSync to:

Synchronize information between your HP iPAQ and up to two computers or one server so that you have the latest information in all locations Change synchronization settings and the synchronization schedule Transfer files between your device and computer Install applications on your HP iPAQ Synchronize links Send and receive email Request meetings Synchronizing your HP iPAQ with your computer allows you to keep the same information (such as calendar, contacts, and email messages) on both units, making it available when you work on your computer or when you take your HP iPAQ on the go. You can synchronize your HP iPAQ with your computer using:

miniUSB synchronization cable Bluetooth To synchronize your HP iPAQ and your computer using the miniUSB synchronization cable:

1. Make sure ActiveSync 4.5 or later is installed on your computer. 2. Plug the USB end of the miniUSB synchronization cable into your computer. 3. Connect the miniUSB end of the synchronization cable to the universal synchronize connector on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. Synchronization begins automatically. CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, check to make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting them. 4. Click Next on the Synchronization Setup Wizard screen. 5. Perform one of the following:

By default, the check box is selected to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange Server. Clear this check box if you do not want to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange server and then click Next. Click Next if you want to synchronize directly with Microsoft Outlook. 6. When the Synchronization Options screen displays, select the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer and then click Next. 7. After your items have been synchronized, click Finish. The Synchronization Setup Wizard starts synchronizing the items you selected. If ActiveSync does not begin the synchronization process, start it manually: On your computer, open ActiveSync by selecting Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection You can change the type of ActiveSync connection being used between your HP iPAQ and your computer to meet your specific needs. You should use USB Serial Sync mode if you:

Are having general problems with the ActiveSync connection between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Need to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer while you are using a Virtual Private Network (VPN) tunnel from your computer. Are running personal or company-enforced firewall software on your computer. You should use USB RNDIS mode if you are transferring large files and do not have any connection issues between your HP iPAQ and your computer. To change to ActiveSync RNDIS mode on your HP iPAQ:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > More > USB. 2. Press Menu > ActiveSync Settings. 3. Scroll and select RNDIS. 4. Press Done. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues Following is a list of symptoms that may indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync chimes sound (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. ActiveSync chimes sound, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The retrieving settings message appears on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. ActiveSync is searching for a connection but cannot establish one. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Check the Operating System (OS) on your computer before you begin synchronizing information between your HP iPAQ and computer. The synchronization method varies depending on the OS running on the computer. If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD. You may also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download Windows Mobile Device Center. NOTE: HP does not guarantee the accurate functionality of any third party applications with Windows Vista. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall programs exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PCcillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite may block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the programs exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit:

http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Make sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Place a check mark in the boxes under the Computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your computer and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. Using Your Smartphone

Using the Home Key

Using the Back key

Using the 4Way Navigation Key

Calling Features

Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength

Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number

Managing Calls Using Call History

Using Wireless Manager

Quick Launch

Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type

Changing Network Settings

Profiles

Automatic Frequency Band Selection

Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device

ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and Email with Exchange/Outlook

Setting up Email

Setting up Email using Exchange Server

Voice Notes Using the Home Key You can use the Home key to return to the Home screen from any application. You can do the following tasks using the Home key:

Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. The Quick List displays a list of available profile types and commands. Press the Home key and use the keypad to dial a number. Using the Back key The Back key is used to return to the previous screen. It is similar to stepping up a folder structure in your computer. Using the 4Way Navigation Key The 4Way Navigation key is used to navigate the menu system, change feature settings, and play games. It is also used to scroll up and down a list to select a desired function. TIP: Down and up are your primary movements within menus and navigation through the contacts. Move left and right to change feature settings and edit text. The top of the Home screen displays the icons of the last ten programs you used so that you can quickly recall them. Press the Action button to open any program. Calling Features This section provides information about the following topics:

Making a Call

Answering a Call

Using Call Waiting

Redialing a Number

Calling a Contact

Making a Call Using Voice Commander

Making Emergency Calls

Making Calls Using Speed Dials

Using Voice mail

Using the Handsfree Function

Monitoring Phone Usage

Making Data Calls

Muting a Call

Putting a Call on Hold

Making a Conference Call

Making a Call From a Hyperlinked Phone Number

Dialing International Numbers Making a Call 1. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to call. 2. Press the Send key to make the call. TIP: To call the person whom you called last, press the Send key twice. Answering a Call To answer a call, press the Send key or press Answer on the screen. When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call, the phone stops ringing and the caller may be sent to Voice mail, depending on the settings provided by your mobile phone service provider. To disregard the call, press Ignore on the onscreen keypad or press the End Call key. Using Call Waiting Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are in another call. To turn on Call Waiting:

1. Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting. 2. Select the Provide call waiting notifications check box. 3. Press Done to save the settings. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. Press Answer to move the current phone call to Call Waiting. 2. Press the Send key to answer the incoming call or press Ignore on the onscreen keypad if you do not want to answer the call. 3. Press Swap to switch between the calls. Redialing a Number To redial the last number called from the Home screen, press the Send key twice. Calling a Contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. This section provides information about the following topics:

Making a Call from the Home Screen

Making a Call from the Contacts

Changing the Default Number for a Contact

Making a Call to a Contact Making a Call from the Home Screen To make calls from the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to enter the contact name. 2. 3. Press the Send key to make the call. In case there is more than one contact with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Making a Call from the Contacts You can select a persons name from your contacts list and press the Send key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax, do the following:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact name. 3. Scroll to the required number and press the Send key to place a call. TIP:

If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contacts name. Your HP iPAQ searches the entire contacts list to display the name. Changing the Default Number for a Contact The Work phone number is set as the default. 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Scroll a contact number. 3. Scroll and select to change default number. Making a Call to a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact you want to call. 3. Press the Action button and scroll to the number you want to call. 4. Press the Send key to place the call. Making a Call Using Voice Commander Press Voice Commander button and say Call (Contact name) to dial a number saved in your HP iPAQ's contacts list or by saying Digit dial (number) to directly call a number not stored in your HP iPAQ. Making Emergency Calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstance, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your HP iPAQs preprogrammed emergency number(s) may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. From the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to dial the local emergency number. 2. Press the Send key to place the call. Making Calls Using Speed Dials You can quickly dial phone numbers by assigning speed dial numbers. Press and hold one or two keys from the Home screen to make a speed dial call. You can choose speed dial entries from 299. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your Voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial feature is available only for phone numbers stored in the Contacts list. To create a speed dial shortcut:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Scroll to the desired contact and press the Action button. 3. Scroll to the desired number and press Menu > Add to Speed Dial to open menu functions. 4. Use navigation keys to select a speed dial number from 299 under Keypad assignment. 5. Press Done. TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and email addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

From the Home screen, press and hold the keypad number you assigned as a speed dial entry. For two-digit speed dial numbers, press the first digit and press and hold the second digit of the number. Using Voice mail From the Home Screen:

Press and hold 1 to automatically call Voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: You may need to set up the Voice mail shortcut. Using the Handsfree Function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree function. 1. Press Menu to open the menu options. 2. Scroll to Speakerphone and press the Action button to turn the speaker on and the earpiece off. Monitoring Phone Usage Call Timers store the length of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use Call Timers to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan or estimate your monthly billing. Press Start > Call History > Menu > View Timers. Making Data Calls Use Data Connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), dialup, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and WiFi connections so you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download email, chat using MSN Messenger, or synchronize with the server without using wires. Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the data call by pressing End. This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your service provider for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring email or wireless synchronizing with the server. Muting a Call You can mute the microphone during an active call. On making a call the other party will not be able to hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. During a call:

Press Mute. Putting a Call on Hold During a call, you can put the call on hold so you can call another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, press Menu and then select Hold. To switch between calls, press Swap. Making a Conference Call You can talk to two or more people simultaneously, using the conference call facility. 1. Press the Send key. 2. Use the keypad to dial the first number. 3. Press the Send key. 4. After you are connected, press Hold. 5. Dial the second number, and then press the Send key. 6. After you are connected, press Menu > Conference. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then press Menu > Conference. Making a Call From a Hyperlinked Phone Number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an email or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an email or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. Scroll to the hyperlinked phone number. 2. Press the Action button to place the call. Dialing International Numbers You can make an international call from your HP iPAQ. To make an international call, enter the country code before the phone number. 1. On the Home screen, press and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign appears. 2. Enter the country code and phone number. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a contact's phone number for quick dialing. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength After you insert an active SIM card into your HP iPAQ, it connects to your service provider's network. The signal strength icon indicates that you are connected to your service provider's network. A full strength connection is indicated by a full signal strength icon. The number of vertical bars in the icon diminish as the signal strength diminishes. No bars indicate no signal. Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number The SIM Personal Identification Number (PIN) protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. Press Start > Settings > Security. 2. Select Change PIN2. 3. Enter your current PIN in Old PIN box. 4. Enter your new PIN in New PIN box. 5. Confirm your new PIN in Confirm new PIN box. 6. Press Done. Managing Calls Using Call History Call History provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. Press Start > Call History to view all of the calls in Call History. Press Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the Call History view. Press Menu > View Timers > Menu > Reset Timers, to reset the Recent calls counter. NOTE: The All Calls counter cannot be reset. Press Menu > Delete Lists to clear the entire Call History. Using Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager, you can easily turn on/off the functions of a WiFi connection, a Bluetooth connection, and Phone features. NOTE: When the Phone feature is turned off, you cannot receive or make a call, including emergency calls. To receive and make a call, turn on the Phone feature and re-engage your phones RF capability. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Option All WiFi Bluetooth Phone Description Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of WiFi, Bluetooth, and Phone features. Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of WiFi connection. Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Bluetooth connection. Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Phone features. Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn on/off all wireless connections at the same time:

1. To use Wireless Manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. Select All and press the Action button to turn on/off all wireless connections. Quick Launch Quick Launch is a simple way for you to open the Quick List that lets you turn off your HP iPAQ, manage wireless connections, change profiles, or lock your keypad. To access the Quick List:

1. Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. 2. Scroll to select from the list. Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. 1. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. 2. Scroll and select a ring tone from the Ring tone box. 3. Press Done. Changing Network Settings You can switch from one network to other as follows:

1. Press Start > Settings > Phone. 2. Select Networks to view your Current network, or Network selection to switch to a different network. TIP: You can select a different network by searching the network either automatically or manually. Profiles You can use profiles on your HP iPAQ to personalize the ringtones, ring volumes, and other settings according to your choice. This section provides information about the following topics:

Using profiles

Editing profiles Using profiles To select a profile:

1. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. TIP: You can also set profiles using Voice Commander. 2. Select any of the listed profiles and press Done to choose that profile. Editing profiles To edit a profile:

1. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. 2. Press Menu > Edit. Scroll and select to edit the following features in a profile:

Name Ring type Ring volume Alarm type Alarm volume Reminder type Reminder volume Notification type System sound volume Automatic Frequency Band Selection Your HP iPAQ has an integrated Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM)/General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)/Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution (EDGE) feature that supports four different frequency bands (850/900/1800/1900) for international roaming. When traveling, between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature changes the connection settings by generating an automatic search for frequency bands when your home bands are not available. This feature is the default setting on your HP iPAQ. To avoid connection problems after you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile phone service provider's Web site to see if service is available where you are traveling. Verify your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device You can copy a contact from the SIM to the device as follows:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Press Menu > Copy Contact. 3. Press Menu > Edit to edit the contact information as needed. 4. Press Done. ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and Email with Exchange/Outlook You can synchronize Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and Email with Exchange/Outlook 1. After your computer is synchronized with your HP iPAQ, click Tools > Options on the Microsoft ActiveSync dialog box. 2. Select the check boxes which you want to synchronize. 3. Click OK. Setting up Email Before sending and receiving email messages, you may have to complete the email account setup. You can send email messages by synchronizing or connecting directly to an email server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a corporate network. You can only have one configurable Outlook email at one time and therefore only synchronize one type of email, either POP3 or computer. If you choose to synchronize your computer email, it will wipe out your POP3 settings. To set up an e-mail account, press Start > Messaging > New Email Account. Description Type your name Enter your email address Select this feature to enable your HP iPAQ to obtain email settings from the internet. Enter your user name Enter your password Enter your domain name, if necessary Check this feature to avoid entering your password repeatedly before you send/receive emails. Select either POP3 or IMAP4 Enter your account name Select The Internet Enter your incoming mail server Check this feature, if necessary Enter your outgoing mail server Check this feature, if necessary Use navigation keys to select messages you want to receive Use navigation keys to select an option Options Your name Email address Automatic setup User name Password Domain (if necessary) Save password Server type Account name Network Incoming Server Require SSL connection Outgoing Server Outgoing server requires authentication Download the following messages Connect automatically and check for messages Setting up Email using Exchange Server 1. Press Start > Messaging > New Email Account. 2. Scroll and select the Exchange Server option from the Your email Source box. 3. Press Next to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange email server. 4. 5. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain on the User Information tab. 6. Select the check box for the items you want to synchronize, and press Finish. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Voice Notes You can use Voice recorder to record audio clips. You can attach them as voice notes to emails, MMS, and meeting notes. Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

WiFi Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE Press Start > Settings > Connections to access all these connection types.

Connecting to Intranet URLs

Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL

Setting Up Proxy Settings

Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect

Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings

Setting Up a VPN Connection

WiFi

Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant

Bluetooth

GPRS/EDGE

Connecting to a Laptop

ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth Connecting to Intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections. 2. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter the URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. 3. Press Menu > Add and in in URL Pattern, enter the intranet URL. NOTE:

If you use many URLs that share the same root company name, you can avoid entering them individually by entering *.companyname.com. Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections. 2. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter an URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. 3. Select the intranet URL you want to change, and then press Menu > Edit to edit. Press Delete to delete the URL. Setting Up Proxy Settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used To set up proxy server settings:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Proxy. 2. Press Menu > Add to set up a new proxy server connection. Press Menu > Edit to edit a proxy server. 3. Scroll to select the required option from the Connects from list. 4. Scroll to select the The Internet option from the Connects to list. 5. 6. Scroll to select the required protocol option from the Type list. In the Proxy (name:port) box, enter the proxy server name and port. Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To set up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. 2. Scroll to select your country from the Country list. 3. Scroll to select your operator from the Operator list. 4. Press Menu > Save to save your operator and country settings. 5. Your HP iPAQ will automatically create a new GPRS connection using your operator settings. Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 1. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. 2. If you are configuring a Socks proxy, select Socks 4 or Socks 5. If using Socks 5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Setting Up a VPN Connection A Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To set up a VPN server connection:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections. 2. Select VPN and press the Action button. 3. Enter the details given by the network administrator. 4. To edit details of an already existing VPN connection, scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Edit. NOTE: To delete an existing connection scroll to select the connection and press Menu >

Delete. WiFi With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLANenabled devices. With WiFi you can:

Access the Internet Send and receive email Access corporate network information Use Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) for secure remote access Use hotspots for wireless connectivity NOTE: Use of dialup and wireless Internet, email, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, may require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard WiFi infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. This section provides information about the following topics:

WiFi Terms

Automatically Connecting to a WiFi Network

Manually Connecting to a WiFi Network

Finding an IP Address

Deleting a Wireless Network Connection

Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings WiFi Terms Term 802.11 standard Device-to-computer or ad-hoc Domain Name System

(DNS) Encryption Hotspots Infrastructure Definition An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. Public or private areas where you can access WiFi service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically Connecting to a WiFi Network When you turn on the WiFi radio, your HP iPAQ automatically detects WiFi networks that are broadcasting their signals. If your WiFi network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it manually. Before trying to connect to a WiFi network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. On the Home screen, scroll and select WiFi to open Wireless Manager. 3. Scroll and select WiFi to turn WiFi on. 4. After your HP iPAQ detects any existing WiFi network, select the network you want to connect to and press Connect. Manually Connecting to a WiFi Network 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > WiFi > New. 2. Enter the network name. 3. Choose a network type. Select Internet to connect to the Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or select Private/Work Network to connect to a company network. You should only choose Private/Work if the network requires a proxy server. 4. Press Next to go to the Network Key screen. To use authentication, select the authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data encryption list. To automatically use a network key, select the The key is automatically provided check box. Else, enter the network key. NOTE: To delete a WiFi connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > WiFi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Finding an IP Address You need to be connected to a WiFi network to find the IP address of your connection 1. Press Start > Settings > More > Wireless LAN. 2. Press Menu > Advanced to find the IP address and network related details of your connection. Deleting a Wireless Network Connection You can delete networks you manually entered. However, if a network was automatically detected, you cannot delete it. To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. To delete a connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > WiFi. 2. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings 802.1x authentication settings provide a method to protect the network behind the access point from intruders as well as provide for dynamic keys and strengthen WiFi encryption. Before performing these steps, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. To manually enter information, press Start > Settings > Connections > WiFi. 2. Select the network you want to configure and press Menu > Edit. 3. Press Next twice to reach the 802.1x screen. Press Use IEEE 802.1x network access control, and then select appropriate EAP type. Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant You can make voice calls using VoIP and Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange (IP PBX) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. To make calls using IP PBX:

1. On the Home screen, scroll to Internet calling, which is off by default, and press the Action button. 2. Scroll and select the required option from the Use Internet Calling box. 3. You need to configure the WiFi settings before you can use VoIP. 4. On the Home screen, the Internet Calling status changes to available or selected. 5. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the Send key. NOTE: On the Home, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service, it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration > New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings 4. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider if available. 5. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy checkbox if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. 6. Enter the Voice mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to connect to any computer or any other compatible device without using cables. This section provides information about the following topics:

Bluetooth Terms

Changing Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth Device Profiles

Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership

Making a Device Discoverable

Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port

Ending a Connection Bluetooth Terms Term Authentication Authorization Bonding (Paired devices) Device address Device discovery Device ID Encryption Passkey Personal Information Manager (PIM) Profiles Service discovery Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks (for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Collection of Bluetooth settings. Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Changing Bluetooth Settings 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. 2. Scroll and select the bluetooth connection for which you want to change the settings. 3. Follow the on screen instructions and press Done. Bluetooth Device Profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Object Exchange (OBEX) Protocol Object Push Protocol (OPP) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership You can create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. After you do this, the devices must have Bluetooth turned on but do not need to be discoverable to exchange information between them. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within 10 meters from each other. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. 3. To create a new partnership press Add New Device. Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. 4. Select the name of the other device you want to create a partnership with and press Next. 5. Specify a Passkey for authentication. 6. Enter the same Passkey on the other device. 7. Press Done. NOTE: Press Menu > Edit to rename a partnership. To end a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth to view all the partnerships you created on your HP iPAQ. 2. Scroll and select the connection you want to delete. Press Menu > Delete. To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, press Yes. 3. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric Passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey box, and press Next. Enter the same Passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a Passkey provides greater security. 4. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Display Name. 5. Press Done. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is switched on and is in the discoverable mode. Making a Device Discoverable 1. Press Start > Setting > Connections > Bluetooth. 2. Press Menu > Turn On Visibility. NOTE:

If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, press Menu > Turn Off Visibility. Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. 3. Press Menu > Com Ports to set up a new port. 4. Press Menu > New Outgoing Port. NOTE: A new Outgoing Port is available only if there is at least one Bluetooth device supporting serial (COM) connection. 5. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE: A port is in use if it cannot be created; if so then select a different numbered port. 6. To limit communication on this COM port only to devices with which your HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure connection check box. 7. Press Done. Ending a Connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via miniUSB synchronization cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. When connected via Bluetooth, press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth and then press Menu > Turn off Bluetooth to end a bluetooth connection. When connected via WiFi, press Start > Settings > Connections > WiFi and then press Menu > Turn off WiFi to end a WiFi connection. GPRS/EDGE EDGE technology provides a connection to the mobile phone network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means with EDGE, your HP iPAQ can have faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Your HP iPAQ supports GPRS. If you want to HP iPAQ to support EDGE technologies, contact your service provider. This section provides information about the following topics:

Changing GPRS Network Settings

Editing Network Parameters Changing GPRS Network Settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS connection information for you. You can change these settings or create your own network settings to your requirements. 1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > GPRS. 2. If your operator name appears in the list, select the name and press Menu > Edit to edit the GPRS network settings. Editing Network Parameters CAUTION: Editing network parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. Connecting to a Laptop You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ guides you during the connection process. Insert a GPRSenabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You may also need to install the software drivers (located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. This section provides information about the following topics:

To Connect to a Laptop using a USB Data Connection

To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection To Connect to a Laptop using a USB Data Connection You may need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the miniUSB synchronization data cable. Your computer may prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. 3. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) option. 4. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. 3. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. 4. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the miniUSB synchronization data cable and press Connect. To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a miniUSB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. Setting Up a Bluetooth Modem Connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. 3. Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. 4. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and create a partnership between them. 6. Press Connect after the partnership is established. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ to communicate with your computer and manage your pictures, data and music folders easily. To use ActiveSync over cable:

1. Connect the USB end of the synchronization cable to a USB port on your computer. 2. Connect the miniUSB end of the synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The connector fits only one way so do not force it. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. 3. When prompted, check the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 4. Select the folder you want to synchronize. 5. Click Explore on the computer ActiveSync dialog box to explore folders present on your HP iPAQ. 6. Press Sync to synchronize the selected folders. NOTE: To configure ActiveSync over GPRS, contact your corporate network administrator. To use ActiveSync over Bluetooth:

NOTE: For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a miniUSB synchronization cable to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, press Start > More > ActiveSync. 3. Press Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and the computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Use ActiveSync Help to do this. 4. 5. Press Sync. After you finish synchronization, press Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. Camera

Using the Digital Camera

Changing Camera Settings

Using the Camcorder

Transfer Images Using the Digital Camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to click and view photos. This section provides information about the following topics:

Capturing Photos

Viewing Photos Capturing Photos You can capture images and store them in your HP iPAQ or memory card. 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Use the 4way Navigation key to zoom in or out. 3. Use the 4way Navigation key to decrease or increase brightness. 4. Press the Action button to click a photo and automatically save it in File manager > My Documents > My Pictures. Viewing Photos To view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. 2. Navigate to a required folder. 3. Press Open to open a folder and press View to view a photo To Change Image Sizes Press the Action button once to the display photo in Full screen view. NOTE: The opened photo displays in the Fit to View screen by default. Press the Action button once while in Full screen view to display the photo in actual view. Press the Action button once while in actual view to return to the fit to screen view. NOTE: You can create folders to manage your pictures. Press Menu > Edit > New Folder to create a new folder. Changing Camera Settings This section provides information about the following topics:

Changing Brightness Settings

Changing Resolution Settings

Changing Mode Settings

Changing Zoom Settings

Changing White Balance Settings

Configuring File Settings Changing Brightness Settings 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > Brightness. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Changing Resolution Settings 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > Resolution. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The Resolution settings can be changed to:

176*144 352*288 320*240 640*480 1280*1024 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it may take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), email, or Bluetooth. Changing Mode Settings 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > Mode. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Mode settings can be changed to:

Timer Set the self-timer to determine after how long you want the camera to click a photo after you press the shutter button. Burst Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Changing Zoom Settings 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > Zoom. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The Zoom settings can be changed to:

Zoom*1(default) Zoom*2 Zoom*3 Changing White Balance Settings 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > White Balance. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The White Balance settings can be changed to:

Automatic (default) Night Sunlight Cloudy Fluorescent Incandescent NOTE: You can choose the preset depending on your shooting conditions. Configuring File Settings Use your HP iPAQ File Settings to resize pictures for email and to optimize for slideshow viewing. Press Start > Camera, and then press Menu > Options to change one or more of following options:

1. General The general settings can be changed to:

Large (640*480) (default) Medium Small Original The orientation of picture can be changed to:

Left Right 2. Slide Show The Slide Show settings can be changed to:

Landscape Portrait Select the Play Screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes check box to make your computer screensaver your HP iPAQ screensaver. 3. Camera Save files to: Press the Action button and scroll to select the phone or storage card as the storage device. The default folder on the device is \My Documents\My Pictures. Type filename prefix: Enter the text you want to add at the beginning of the filename. NOTE: You can save the filename prefix with any alpha numeric character and certain symbols. Still image compression level: Press the Action button and scroll to select the required option. NOTE: Higher-quality pictures look better, but are also larger in file size. Lower-quality pictures require less storage space and may take less time when sending by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), or email. Using the Camcorder This section provides information about the following topics:

Recording Videos

Configuring Video Format Recording Videos You can use the built-in camcorder on your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. Press Start > Camera. 2. Press Menu > Video. 3. Press the Action button to start recording. Press the Action button again to stop recording. Configuring Video Format Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos, and then press Menu > Options > Video. Select the Include audio when recording video files check box to record both audio and video. Set time limit to one of the following:

30 Seconds 15 Seconds No Limit NOTE: By default, all the pictures and videos are stored in \My Documents\My Pictures. Transfer Images This section provides information about the following topics:

Using GPRS

Using Bluetooth Using GPRS When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. 2. Press Menu > New. 3. Navigate to highlight Insert Picture/Video area. 4. Press the Action button to open Pictures & Videos. 5. Navigate to a required picture you want to add and press the Action button. 6. Press Send. Using Bluetooth You can do the following to transfer images from your HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. 2. Scroll and select a picture. 3. Press Menu > Beam. Select the device and press Beam. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. Messaging You can use your HP iPAQ to keep in touch with your family and friends through messaging. Use your HP iPAQ to keep you updated on your email messages. You can also keep a track of appointments and meetings using your HP iPAQ.

Understanding Messages

Using Folders

Synchronizing Email

Composing Email using Voice Commander

Setting up Messaging Accounts

Using Messaging

Windows Live Messenger Understanding Messages To send and receive email messages using your HP iPAQ, you can:

Send and receive email messages using the Direct Push Technology for Exchange server. Send and receive email messages for an email account with an ISP. Send and receive email messages for an email account that you access using your VPN connection. You will need your account settings for VPN connection (typically a work account). You can also send pictures, video, and audio files on your phone and storage card using MMS. You can send only pictures, or a combination of pictures and videos, or audio files. Text can also be added to a MMS slide. Text messages can be sent using your HP iPAQ. Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using the phone number as the message address. NOTE: MMS or Internet email is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) email server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your ISP. You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Using Folders Each messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items The messages you send and receive through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each account. The way folders work vary by type:

1. ActiveSync: If you use an Outlook email account, email messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your HP iPAQ. You can choose to synchronize additional folders by designating them for synchronization. The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the email server. You can read the messages while you are away from your computer. 2. MMS/Text Messages: If you use an MMS account or a text message account, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. 3. POP3 account: If you use a POP3 account and you move email messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on your HP iPAQ and their copies on the e mail server. When you connect, the email server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on your HP iPAQ and deletes them from the email server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except your HP iPAQ. 4. IMAP4 account: If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the email messages you move are mirrored on the email server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your email server, whether it is from your HP iPAQ or computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your email server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronizing Email When you synchronize Outlook email on a computer with your device, email messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook email account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it gets deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days only and the first 2 KB of each new message is downloaded. NOTE: Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your HP iPAQ via your service provider. Composing Email using Voice Commander You can use the Voice Commander feature on your HP iPAQ to select the recipient of your email. 1. Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Email to (contact name) to launch the email compose form with the recipient added. 3. You can now compose your message by speaking into the microphone. This audio file will be sent as an attachment. To compose an audio email:

1. Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Audio Email to (contact name) to start recording. 3. Record your message and press Stop. 4. Say Confirm if you want to send the message or say Retry/Cancel. Setting up Messaging Accounts This section provides information about the following topics:

Text Messaging

MMS Messaging

Setting up Email using Exchange Server

Setting up Email using POP3 or IMAP4 account

Receiving Email Attachments

Receiving Meeting Requests

Creating or Changing a Signature Text Messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message cannot be longer than 160 alphanumeric characters or cannot contain pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alphanumeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. MMS Messaging The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on your HP iPAQ. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless the change is requested. Setting up Email using Exchange Server 1. Press Start > Messaging > New Email Account. 2. Scroll and select the Exchange Server option from the Your email Source box. Press Next. 3. Press Next again to synchronize Outlook with your organization's Exchange email server. 4. 5. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. 6. Select the check boxes of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Setting up Email using POP3 or IMAP4 account 1. Press Start > Messaging > New Email Account. 2. Scroll and select the Other option from the Your email Source box. Press Next. 3. Scroll and select the Other (POP/IMAP) option from the Your email provider box. Press Next. 4. Enter your name and email address and press Next. 5. Press Done. Receiving Email Attachments An attachment sent with an email message or downloaded from the server appears below the subject of the message. Navigate to select the already downloaded attachment or mark an attachment to download it the next time you send and receive email. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook email or IMAP4 email account. If you have an Outlook email account, do the following on ActiveSync dialog box:

1. Click Start > ActiveSync. 2. Click Options. 3. Click Email > Settings, and then select the Include File Attachments check box. NOTE: To open a recorded message received as an attachment, scroll to the recorded message and press the Action button. If you have an IMAP4 email account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. Press Start > Messaging. 2. Press Menu > Tools > Options. 3. Select the name of the IMAP4 account. 4. Press Next until you reach Server information, and press Options. 5. Press Next twice, and select the check boxes Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. NOTE: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive email. However, this feature does not work if Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. Receiving Meeting Requests If you receive your email messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an email server, the server must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time may be longer. Change email download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. Press the Action button to open the meeting request you received. 2. Press Accept. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response is sent the next time synchronize or connect to your email server, and your device calendar is updated. Creating or Changing a Signature 1. Press Start > Outlook Email. 2. Press Menu > Tools > Options. 3. Press Signatures and scroll to select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. 4. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. 5. Select the Include when replying and forwarding check box, if required. 6. Enter a signature in the box. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each messaging account. Using Messaging This section provides information about the following topics:

Composing and Sending Messages

Replying or Forwarding a Message

Adding an Attachment to a Message

Downloading Messages

Downloading Messages from a Server Composing and Sending Messages To compose a text message:

1. Press Start > Messaging. Select the account you want to use. 2. Press Menu > New and navigate to highlight the text area. Enter your text. To send pictures/videos using MMS:

1. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. 2. Press Menu > New. 3. Scroll and select the Insert Picture/Video area. 4. Press the Action button and navigate to add the required image. 5. Select a recipient, enter a subject and then press Send. To add preset or recorded audio (except when video already exists):

1. Scroll and select the Insert Audio area. 2. Press the Action button to open the Audio folder and navigate to select a required audio clip. 3. Press Select to attach the audio clip. TIP:

If you are working offline, email messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. Replying or Forwarding a Message 1. Press the Action button to open the selected message, and then press Menu > Reply, Reply All, or Menu > Forward. 2. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, press Menu > My Text and navigate to select a required message. 3. Press Send. NOTE: You can also use the voice commander to reply to any message. Use HP Voice Reply to reply using an audio email message. Adding an Attachment to a Message In an opened message, press Menu > Insert. 1. 2. Select the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. Downloading Messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

1. To send and receive email for an Outlook email account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. 2. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in your Outlook email messaging list, press Menu > Tools > Options > Message, and select the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an IMAP4 account, press Menu > Folders and navigate to select the Sent Items folder check box. Press Sync to synchronize this folder. Downloading Messages from a Server 1. On the message list, press Menu > Tools > Switch Accounts and select the account you want to use. 2. Press Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and email server are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the device Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. Windows Live Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature, you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages. Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft.NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft.NET Passport account, go to http://www.passport.net. After you have an account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. This section provides information about the following topics:

Signing In and Out of Messenger

Sending Instant Messages

Changing Your Status Signing In and Out of Messenger Press Start > More > Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign into the Messenger:

1. Press Sign In after navigating to a required sign-in status. 2. Enter your information in the Sign-in and Password box. Press Sign In. To sign out of the Messenger:

Press Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN Messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which may result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session User Accepts an incoming voice call An outgoing voice call is placed The device is turned off or moves out of range Sending Instant Messages You can send Instant Messages from your MSN Messenger to contacts on your messenger list. To send Instant Messages:

1. Select the person to whom you want to send an Instant Message and press Send. 2. Enter your message, and press Send. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Press Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Press Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Press Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you Instant Messages. NOTE: Press Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Press Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by pressing Menu > Chats. Changing Your Status You can change your status on MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. Press the Action button to select your name in the contact list. 2. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. Calendar

Keeping Track of Appointments

Creating an Appointment

Updating an Appointment

Canceling an Appointment

Changing the Display of the Work Week Keeping Track of Appointments You can keep a track of your appointments in various views:

1. 2. 3. In Agenda View, you can keep track of appointments for the current date. In Week View, you can also keep track of appointments in a week. In Month View, you can also keep track of appointments in a month. NOTE: You can select the type of views you want from the Menu options. Creating an Appointment To create an appointment on your calendar:

1. Press Start > Calendar. 2. Press Menu > New Appointment. 3. Enter your schedule for an appointment. 4. Press Done. Updating an Appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. Press Start > Calendar. 2. Select and open the appointment, and then press Menu > Edit to make your changes. 3. Press Done. Canceling an Appointment When you delete an appointment in calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment has not been synchronized with a computer, it will be deleted only from your HP iPAQ. In Agenda View, select and open the appointment to delete. 1. Press Start > Calendar. 2. 3. Press Menu > Delete. 4. Press Yes to delete the appointment, or press No to keep it. NOTE: Calendar items can be deleted only from Agenda View or from an open calendar appointment. To delete from Week and Month views, open the appointment, and press Menu > Delete. TIP: You can also press Start > Calendar, select the appointment to delete and press Menu > Delete Appointment. Changing the Display of the Work Week You can customize your calendar for a work week to start on Sunday or Monday. You can schedule your calendar for a five to seven-day week. To change the display of the work week:

1. Press Start > Calendar. 2. Press Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, select Sunday or Monday in the First day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, select 5day week, 6day week, or 7day week in the Week view box. 3. Press Done. Contacts

Adding a Contact

Deleting a Contact

Changing Contact Information

Copying a Contact

Adding a Photo

Sending an Email Message to a Contact

Sending a Text Message to a Contact

Adding and Removing a Picture

Working with the Contact List Adding a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Press New to add a new contact. 3. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact type. 4. Enter the information. 5. Press Done. TIP: Select Outlook Contact type to enter more information about contact. Deleting a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact you want to delete. 3. Press Menu > Delete Contact. 4. Press Yes to delete the contact, or press No to keep it. Changing Contact Information You can include a nickname, job title, or any other information, for an existing contact. 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Press Menu > Edit and make your changes. 4. When finished, press Done. Copying a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact you want to copy. 3. Press Menu > Copy Contact. 4. Select the copy of the contact to make your changes. 5. Press Menu > Edit. 6. Change the contact information as needed and press Done. NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Adding a Photo To add a photo to contact information:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Press Menu > Edit. 4. Select Picture. 5. Do one of the following:

Select the photo you want to add Select Camera and take a photo 6. Press Done. Sending an Email Message to a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. 3. Select the address you want to send a message to and press Email. 4. Select the account you want to send the message from. 5. Enter your message and press Send. NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, select the To, Cc, or Bcc line, and press Menu > Add Recipient. Select the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address. Sending a Text Message to a Contact 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. 3. Select Send text message and press Text. 4. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, press Menu > My Text and select a desired message. 5. Press Send. If you are working offline, email messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, press Menu > Message Options. Select the Request delivery notification check box and press Done. Adding and Removing a Picture To add a picture to the contact information:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Press Menu > Edit. 4. Select Picture. 5. Do one of the following:

Select the picture you want to add. Select Camera and take a picture. 6. Press Done. To remove a picture from the contact information:

1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Press Menu > Edit. 4. Press Menu > Remove Picture. 5. Press Yes to remove the picture, or press No to keep it. Working with the Contact List There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. Here are a few tips on how to make it work for you. 1. Press Start > Contacts. 2. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Name view. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, press Menu > View By > Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, press the contact. From there, you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, press and hold the contact. Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3 music using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS Office applications to view presentations, spreadsheets, and documents.

Using HP Applications

Using Windows Media MP3 Player

Using Voice Recorder

Using MS Office Applications

File Management

Playing Games

Internet Explorer Using HP Applications This section provides information about the following topics:

Using HP Voice Reply

HP iPAQ Setup Assistant

Voice Commands

HP iPAQ Shortcuts

Task Manager

HP iPAQ DataConnect

HP iPAQ Tips

HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour Using HP Voice Reply You can use HP Voice Reply to reply to your email messages or compose a new email. You can either do a reply to all, just reply to the sender, or forward a message. Use HP Voice Reply with your Outlook account as well as the POP3 and IMAP4 accounts from your HP iPAQ. You can access HP Voice Reply in three different views:

List View While reviewing a list of messages in the Inbox. Read View While reading a particular message from the list of messages in the Inbox. Compose View While composing a new email message, replying to an email message, or forwarding an email message. To use HP Voice Reply:

1. When composing a new email message or replying or forwarding a message, press Menu >

HP Voice Reply to select either of the following options:

Reply to Sender To send your reply only to the recipient who initially sent you the e mail message. Reply to All To send your reply to all the recipients of the initial email message. Forward To forward the initial email message with your reply to any recipient. NOTE: The three submenu options: Reply to Sender, Reply to All, and Forward are available under the List and Read views. 2. Next, in the recording window, press Record to record your message. NOTE:

If you are in Compose view, press Menu > HP Voice Reply to go to the recording window directly. 3. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. You can do one of the following after you finish recording:

Press Done to attach and send your recorded message. Press Menu > Play to review your recorded message. Press Done to attach and send the message. Press Menu > Record to re-record the message. Press Done to attach and send the message. Press Cancel to cancel the recording and exit the recording window. 4. The recorded message is automatically attached to your email. 5. Enter any short text message if required. You may also make changes to the editable fields in the email. 6. Press Send to send the message to the recipient. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network Wireless Network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. Email Email settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet email accounts. Exchange Server Exchange Server is used to access email, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to synchronize directly with your organizations Exchange Server. VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) routes voice conversations using an IPbased network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. Speed Dial HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for Voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider may also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. Voice Commands Use voice commands to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the Voice Commander button to launch the voice commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command into the microphone. NOTE: You can also launch the voice commander by pressing the hookswitch on your HP iPAQ headset. To Call a contact saved in the contact list Find a contact saved in the contact list To call numbers not stored in the contact list Say Call followed by the name or by speaking the 7 digit or 10 digit number without a pause Find followed by the name of the contact Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number, Redial to redial the number, and Callback to call the last dialled number Important! The Digit Dial feature may not be available in all regions. To play, pause, and/or resume music Play Music/Pause/Resume To play an existing music file To play the previous or the next song in the playlist To open an application View appointments Play followed by the name of the music file Previous/Next Start followed by the application name

<Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments> to list the appointments for the day, next day, or the present week Read<SMS/Email>/Call history Read messages, emails, check call history View time What is the time?

View the different set of commands What can I say?

To close Voice Commander application To compose an email To compose an audio email Goodbye To change profiles To dial a number using speed dial To record an audio note To see all reminders To schedule a call Compose Email To (Contact) Compose Audio Email to (Contact) to start recording an audio message Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number Start Recording to open the voice recorder and start recording Reminder Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact HP iPAQ Shortcuts This section provides information about the following topics:

Using HP iPAQ Shortcuts

Editing HP iPAQ Shortcuts Using HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts to access a list of shortcuts to your favorite applications or features on your HP iPAQ. You can edit the default shortcuts list or create new shortcuts and store them in the existing list. To use HP iPAQ Shortcuts:

1. From the Home screen, press Shortcuts. 2. Scroll to the application you want to use. 3. Press the Action button or Select to select the application. Editing HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can change the default shortcuts and assign different applications. To edit a shortcut:

1. Scroll to the shortcut you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and press Menu > Edit. 2. To change the default shortcuts to different applications, scroll to Select new target and press the Action button. 3. Select Tasks, Programs, Web Links, or File and press Select or the Action button. 4. Select an application for which you want to create a shortcut. 5. The selected application is shown on the Edit screen in the Shortcut name box. Press Save to save the application shortcut in the shortcut list. NOTE: To modify the name, specify a new name in the Shortcut name box and press Save to save the modified name. Task Manager 1. Press Start > Accessories > Task Manager. TIP: You can also press Start > Accessories > Resource Manager > Menu > Task Manager. 2. From the Application list, select the program you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Kill All to close all open programs. HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To configure GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the process of setting up GPRS using your HP iPAQ DataConnect. HP iPAQ Tips Use HP iPAQ Tips to perform operations on your HP iPAQ in a quick and efficient manner. A tip is displayed on your screen every time you switch on your HP iPAQ. Press Menu > Next to display the next tip. You can also access HP iPAQ Tips by pressing Start > More > Accessories >

HP iPAQ Tips. HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour is a fun way to learn more about your HP iPAQ. It provides basic information about the tasks and activities you can perform using your HP iPAQ. You can try each feature as you go through this tutorial. You can return to the same position in the QuickStart tour by simply selecting Start > More > HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour. Using Windows Media MP3 Player Press Start > More > Windows Media to open the windows media player. Using Windows Media 10 series, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. It supports three different display screens:

Play (default) screen To display the Play screen, navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder and press the Action button. Now Playing screen To display the Now Playing screen, press Now Playing from the Play screen. Library screen To display the Library screen, press Menu > Library > My Device

(HP iPAQ) or Memory. NOTE: Press Menu > Update Library to search for folders on your HP iPAQ or memory card and add the folders to the Library screen. To create a new playlist:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open File. 2. Navigate to the required media file, and press Menu > Queue Up to add the media file in the Now Playing screen. 3. Press Menu > Now Playing to go to the Now Playing screen. 4. Press Menu > Save Playlist to save the list of media files on the Now Playing screen. NOTE: Navigate the Library screen to select the playlist you want to delete, and then press Menu > Delete From Library. To play a streaming media file on the web:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open URL. 2. Enter the URL for streaming file, and press OK. To play media files:

1. Navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder, and press the Action button. 2. On the Play screen, press Menu > Play/Pause to play or pause the media file. 3. Press Menu > Stop to stop the currently playing media file. NOTE: On the Play and Now Playing screen, press Menu > Shuffle/Repeat to play all the files in the playlist randomly or repeatedly. You can play your media files by using the voice commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music (Media File Name) to play the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the Voice Commander button and say Pause Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. Using Voice Recorder You can use the voice recording feature of your HP iPAQ to record voice clips, and use them as a voice note in your emails or MMS. To record voice clips:

1. Press Start > More > Voice Recorder. 2. Press Record to start recording a voice clip. Press Menu > Play to play the recorded voice clip. 3. To delete or rename the voice clip, press Menu > Rename/Delete. 4. Press Menu > Set as Ringtone to set the voice clip as your HP iPAQ ringtone. Using MS Office Applications To use MS Excel applications:

1. Press Start > More > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. 4. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. To use MS Word applications:

1. Press Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. 4. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. To use MS PowerPoint applications:

1. Press Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. 4. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. File Management Press Start > More > File Manager to explore the file manager. To view your files and folders, use:

Tree View: Displays the entire file structure in your phone memory. The functions in Tree View primarily focus on folder management. List View: Displays the selected folder and its sub-folders and files. The functions in List View are basically file-oriented. To delete a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be deleted, and press Menu > File > Delete. 2. Press Yes to delete. To copy/paste a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be copied, and press Menu > File > Copy To. 2. Navigate the List view to select the destination folder, and press Menu > Paste to paste the file. To create shortcut:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file for which you want to create a shortcut, and press Menu > File > Create Shortcut. 2. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the destination folder to save the shortcut in and press Done. Playing Games This section provides information about the following topics:

Playing Bubble Breaker

Playing Solitaire Playing Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer the balls you leave behind, more the scores you get. To start a new game:

1. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. 2. Press Menu > New to open a new game of Bubble Breaker. 3. Press Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. 4. To edit the settings for the game, press Menu > Options. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, press Menu > Undo. To play a game:

1. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. 2. Press Menu > New to open a new game of Bubble Breaker. 3. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. 4. Press the Action button twice to delete the balls from the screen. Playing Solitaire The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. Press Menu > More > Games > Solitaire. 2. Press the number or character above the card stack displaying the card you want to move, and press the number or character above the card stack to which you want to move the card. 3. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. NOTE: Press the Navigation Key up to move a card to one of the four card stacks on the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 4. When you have made all the available plays, press Draw to turn over cards. Internet Explorer Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile favorites. 2. Navigate the favorite list and press Go to open the desired link. 3. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. To open a link using homepage:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile favorites. Press Menu >

Homepage to go the homepage. 2. Enter the link you want to connect to and press the Action button. 3. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. 4. Press Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and press Menu > Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. 5. Press Menu > History to display the history. NOTE: Press Menu > Options to change General, Connections, and Memory settings. Storage Cards

Using Storage Cards

Inserting a Storage Card

Removing a Storage Card

Viewing Content of a Storage Card Using Storage Cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards must be purchased separately and are not included with your HP iPAQ. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/accessories/ipaq. Inserting a Storage Card To insert a storage card into the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Locate the storage card slot on the side of your HP iPAQ. 2. Open the protective cover. 3. Insert the storage card into the storage card slot and push the connection edge of the card firmly into the storage card slot. NOTE:

If your storage card is not recognized, follow the card manufacturer's instructions to install it. If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Make sure the label is facing down. Make sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Make sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Removing a Storage Card To remove a Micro Secure Digital (MicroSD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. Remove the card from the storage card slot by lightly pushing on the card to unlock it. 3. When the card disengages and pops out, pull it from the storage card slot. Viewing Content of a Storage Card Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. Press Start > File Manager. 2. Navigate to select the Memory Card folder to see a list of files and folders. If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Make sure you have firmly pushed the storage card into the storage slot. Make sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. Synchronizing

Copying (or Transferring) Files

Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard

Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips Copying (or Transferring) Files You can copy (transfer) files to and from your computer using Explore in ActiveSync and Windows Explorer. To copy (transfer) files:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer via the miniUSB synchronization cable. 2. On your computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. Select Explore. 4. Double-click Mobile Device. 5. On your computer, rightclick the Start menu, and select Explore. 6. Locate the file to be moved. NOTE: You cannot copy pre-installed files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. Move your files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents), so the programs on your device can locate them. Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard If you used a Palm Operating System (OS) based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard. To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard:

1. Make sure you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or a higher version installed on your computer. 2. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CDROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default email program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for Email, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall HotSync from your computer. Click Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the onscreen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computer's CDROM drive and follow the onscreen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. 5. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Do this Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device powerdown timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. Tasks

Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task

Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List

Marking a Task as Completed Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task 1. Press Start > Tasks. 2. Select and open the task you want to set start and due dates for. NOTE: To create a new task, press Start > Tasks > Menu > New Task. 3. Press Edit and do one or both of the following:

Select Start date to enter a start date for the task. Select Due date to enter a due date for the task. 4. Press Done. Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List 1. Press Start > Tasks. 2. Press Menu > Options. 3. Select the Show start and due dates check box. 4. Press Done. Marking a Task as Completed To mark a task as completed:

1. Press Start > Tasks. 2. In the task list, select the task you want to complete and press Complete to mark a check box as completed. To mark an open task as completed:

1. Select and open the task you want to complete. 2. Press Edit. 3. 4. Press Done. In the Status box, select the Completed check box. Product Specifications

System Specifications

Physical Specifications

Operating Environment System Specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings >

System tab > Asset Viewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Description TI OMAP 850 Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard 128MB/64MB (NAND, ROM/RAM) 5 W maximum output AC adapter with detachable heads, voltage range 100 to 240 V switching, input current 0.2 A AC maximum, Display LED Backlight Secure Digital (SD) Slot Wired Stereo Headset Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth WiFi input frequency 50 to 60 Hz, output voltage 5 V DC, output current 1 A TFT Microreflective, 176x220 2.0, 65K Colors Multi-level brightness adjustment with power save mode Supports micro SD memory 3.5mm jack with dual earbud style headset Included in box Internal, Quad-Band antenna Speaker, and one 3.5mm stereo headset jack 1,100 mAh LiIon removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 1.2, Profiles: Headset/ Handsfree/

OBEX/ PAN/ FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 meter range (approximately 33 feet) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices WiFi 802.11b/g Physical Specifications Length Width Depth Weight US 4.65 in 2.8 in 0.71 in 5.8 oz Metric 107.0 mm 48.6 mm 16.3 mm 102 g Operating Environment Temperature Relative Humidity Maximum Altitude Operating Non-operating Operating Non-operating Operating Non-operating US 32 to 104F 4 to 140F 85 % RH 0%

0 15,000 ft 0 40,000 ft Metric 0 to 40C 20 to 60C 85 % RH 0%

0 4572 m 0 12192 m Regulatory Notices

Federal Communications Commission Notice

Canadian Notice

Avis Canadien

European Union Notice

Battery Warning

Battery Recycling

Battery Disposal

Equipment Warning

Airline Travel Notice

Medical Electronic Equipment

SAR Notice

Wireless Notices

Japanese Notice

Taiwan DGT Notice

Korean Notice

Acoustics Warning Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This section provides information about the following topics:

Modifications

Cables

Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo

(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 772692000 or call 1800HPINVENT (18004746836) For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 772692000 or call HP at 2815143333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with thecorrect CEmarked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. This section provides information about the following topics:

Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices This section provides information about the following topics:

France

Italy France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions: cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire2400MHz to 2483.5MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454MHz to 2483.5MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not beused. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines

(ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 1.15 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal.

* The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Wireless Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. This section provides information about the following topics:

U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice

Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice

Brazilian Notice

Singaporean Wireless Notice U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 1.5 cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth, WLAN, and mobile phone are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicles lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. Japanese Notice This section provides information about the following topics:

Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices

Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices

Bluetooth Devices Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices Taiwan DGT Notice Korean Notice Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage your hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 503322. HP recommends to use the headset delivered with your HP iPAQ (part number 430219, manufactured by Plantronics), that is in compliance to EN 503321. Frequently Asked Questions

I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ appears to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on the battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of the network signal good?

Is the network setup properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

You may be unable to hear to voices clearly if you turn on the in-call mute function. Turn off this function to be able to listen to voices clearly. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe to these services from your service operator. Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

It is recommended to have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ for the device to operate efficiently. To check the free memory space, press Start > Settings > More >

About. Remember to delete or transfer old messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Home screen layout error message if you did not select a Home screen layout. To correct this, press Start > Settings > Home Screen and select a layout for the Home screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. Care and Maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition.

Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ

Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ

Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ

Guidelines for using accessories

Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in the rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can shortcircuit the battery and result in danger. Transfer your SMS messages from the HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Guidelines for using accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places.

 

 

HP iPAQ Product Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft, Windows, the Windows logo, Outlook, and ActiveSync are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP iPAQ Products are Powered by Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. under license. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This product's real time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this can document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Second Edition May 2007 Document Part Number: 446232-002 Table of contents 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................................... 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents ........................................................................................................................................ 2 3 Components Front Panel Components ..................................................................................................................... 3 Bottom Panel Components .................................................................................................................. 4 Left and Right Side Components ......................................................................................................... 4 Back Panel Components ...................................................................................................................... 5 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card .................................................................. 6 Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover ...................................................................... 7 Step 3: Charge the battery ................................................................................................................... 7 Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................................. 8 Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password .......................................................................................... 8 Finding the Serial and Model Number .................................................................................................. 8 Status Icons .......................................................................................................................................... 8 5 Learning the Basics Home Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Battery Saving Tips ............................................................................................................................ 10 Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................... 10 Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................... 11 Changing Input Modes ....................................................................................................... 11 Entering Text in the Multipress Mode ................................................................................ 11 Entering Text in the T9 Mode ............................................................................................ 12 Entering the Owner Information ......................................................................................................... 12 Viewing the Operating System Information ........................................................................................ 12 Changing the Regional Settings ......................................................................................................... 12 Adjusting the Volume ......................................................................................................................... 13 Setting the Ringtone .......................................................................................................... 13 Adjusting Speaker Volume ................................................................................................ 13 Changing the Power Management Settings ....................................................................................... 13 Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight ........................................................................ 13 Installing and Removing Programs .................................................................................................... 14 Opening and Closing Programs ......................................................................................................... 14 Customizing the HP iPAQ .................................................................................................................. 14 Setting Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 15 Creating and Assigning a Category .................................................................................................... 15 Synchronization .................................................................................................................................. 15 iii Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection ................................................................................... 16 Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues .............................................................................. 17 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key .......................................................................................................................... 19 Using the Back key ............................................................................................................................. 19 Using the 4-Way Navigation Key ........................................................................................................ 19 Calling Features ................................................................................................................................. 19 Making a Call ..................................................................................................................... 19 Answering a Call ................................................................................................................ 19 Using Call Waiting ............................................................................................................. 19 Redialing a Number ........................................................................................................... 20 Calling a Contact ............................................................................................................... 20 Making a Call Using Voice Commander ............................................................................ 21 Making Emergency Calls ................................................................................................... 21 Making Calls Using Speed Dials ........................................................................................ 21 Using Voice mail ................................................................................................................ 22 Using the Handsfree Function ........................................................................................... 22 Monitoring Phone Usage ................................................................................................... 22 Making Data Calls .............................................................................................................. 22 Muting a Call ...................................................................................................................... 22 Putting a Call on Hold ........................................................................................................ 22 Making a Conference Call ................................................................................................. 23 Making a Call From a Hyperlinked Phone Number ........................................................... 23 Dialing International Numbers ........................................................................................... 23 Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength ................................................................................ 23 Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number ............................................................................ 23 Managing Calls Using Call History ..................................................................................................... 24 Using Wireless Manager .................................................................................................................... 24 Quick Launch ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type ............................................................................................ 25 Changing Network Settings ................................................................................................................ 25 Profiles ............................................................................................................................................... 25 Using profiles ..................................................................................................................... 25 Editing profiles ................................................................................................................... 25 Automatic Frequency Band Selection ................................................................................................ 26 Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device ....................................................................................... 26 ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and E-mail with Exchange/Outlook ............ 26 Setting up E-mail ................................................................................................................................ 26 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server .......................................................................................... 27 Voice Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 27 7 Connections Connecting to Intranet URLs .............................................................................................................. 28 Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL ............................................................................................... 28 Setting Up Proxy Settings .................................................................................................................. 28 Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect ................................................................................ 29 Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings ................................................................................................ 29 Setting Up a VPN Connection ............................................................................................................ 29 Wi-Fi ................................................................................................................................................... 30 iv Wi-Fi Terms ....................................................................................................................... 30 Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .................................................................... 30 Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network ........................................................................... 31 Finding an IP Address ....................................................................................................... 31 Deleting a Wireless Network Connection .......................................................................... 31 Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings ....................................................................... 32 Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant ......................................................................... 32 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................ 32 Bluetooth Terms ................................................................................................................ 33 Changing Bluetooth Settings ............................................................................................. 33 Bluetooth Device Profiles ................................................................................................... 33 Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership ................................................. 34 Making a Device Discoverable .......................................................................................... 34 Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port ................................................................. 35 Ending a Connection ......................................................................................................... 35 GPRS/EDGE ...................................................................................................................................... 35 Changing GPRS Network Settings .................................................................................... 35 Editing Network Parameters .............................................................................................. 35 Connecting to a Laptop ...................................................................................................................... 36 To Connect to a Laptop using a USB Data Connection .................................................... 36 To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection ................................................. 36 ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth ............................................................................ 37 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera ................................................................................................................... 38 Capturing Photos ............................................................................................................... 38 Viewing Photos .................................................................................................................. 38 Changing Camera Settings ................................................................................................................ 38 Changing Brightness Settings ........................................................................................... 38 Changing Resolution Settings ........................................................................................... 39 Changing Mode Settings ................................................................................................... 39 Changing Zoom Settings ................................................................................................... 39 Changing White Balance Settings ..................................................................................... 39 Configuring File Settings .................................................................................................... 40 Using the Camcorder ......................................................................................................................... 41 Recording Videos .............................................................................................................. 41 Configuring Video Format .................................................................................................. 41 Transfer Images ................................................................................................................................. 41 Using GPRS ...................................................................................................................... 41 Using Bluetooth ................................................................................................................. 42 9 Messaging Understanding Messages ................................................................................................................... 43 Using Folders ..................................................................................................................................... 43 Synchronizing E-mail .......................................................................................................................... 44 Composing E-mail using Voice Commander ...................................................................................... 44 Setting up Messaging Accounts ......................................................................................................... 45 Text Messaging ................................................................................................................. 45 MMS Messaging ................................................................................................................ 45 Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server ......................................................................... 45 v Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account .............................................................. 45 Receiving E-mail Attachments ........................................................................................... 46 Receiving Meeting Requests ............................................................................................. 46 Creating or Changing a Signature ..................................................................................... 47 Using Messaging ................................................................................................................................ 47 Composing and Sending Messages .................................................................................. 47 Replying or Forwarding a Message ................................................................................... 48 Adding an Attachment to a Message ................................................................................. 48 Downloading Messages ..................................................................................................... 48 Downloading Messages from a Server .............................................................................. 48 Windows Live Messenger .................................................................................................................. 48 Signing In and Out of Messenger ...................................................................................... 49 Sending Instant Messages ................................................................................................ 49 Changing Your Status ........................................................................................................ 50 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments ......................................................................................................... 51 Creating an Appointment .................................................................................................................... 51 Updating an Appointment ................................................................................................................... 51 Canceling an Appointment ................................................................................................................. 51 Changing the Display of the Work Week ............................................................................................ 52 11 Contacts Adding a Contact ................................................................................................................................ 53 Deleting a Contact .............................................................................................................................. 53 Changing Contact Information ............................................................................................................ 53 Copying a Contact .............................................................................................................................. 53 Adding a Photo ................................................................................................................................... 54 Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact .......................................................................................... 54 Sending a Text Message to a Contact ............................................................................................... 54 Adding and Removing a Picture ......................................................................................................... 55 Working with the Contact List ............................................................................................................. 55 12 Applications Using HP Applications ........................................................................................................................ 56 Using HP Voice Reply ....................................................................................................... 56 HP iPAQ Setup Assistant .................................................................................................. 57 Voice Commands .............................................................................................................. 57 HP iPAQ Shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 58 Task Manager .................................................................................................................... 59 HP iPAQ DataConnect ...................................................................................................... 59 HP iPAQ Tips ..................................................................................................................... 59 HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour .................................................................................................. 59 Using Windows Media MP3 Player .................................................................................................... 59 Using Voice Recorder ........................................................................................................................ 60 Using MS Office Applications ............................................................................................................. 61 File Management ................................................................................................................................ 61 Playing Games ................................................................................................................................... 62 Playing Bubble Breaker ..................................................................................................... 62 vi Playing Solitaire ................................................................................................................. 62 Internet Explorer ................................................................................................................................. 63 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards .......................................................................................................................... 64 Inserting a Storage Card .................................................................................................................... 64 Removing a Storage Card .................................................................................................................. 64 Viewing Content of a Storage Card .................................................................................................... 64 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files ........................................................................................................... 66 Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard ................................ 66 Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips ....................................................................................... 67 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task ........................................................................................ 68 Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List ................................................................................... 68 Marking a Task as Completed ............................................................................................................ 68 16 Product Specifications System Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 69 Physical Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 69 Operating Environment ...................................................................................................................... 70 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice ................................................................................... 71 Modifications ...................................................................................................................... 71 Cables ................................................................................................................................ 71 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) .................................................................................................................................. 72 Canadian Notice ................................................................................................................................. 72 Avis Canadien .................................................................................................................................... 72 European Union Notice ...................................................................................................................... 72 Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices .................................................................. 74 Battery Warning .................................................................................................................................. 74 Battery Recycling ............................................................................................................................... 74 Battery Disposal ................................................................................................................................. 74 Equipment Warning ............................................................................................................................ 75 Airline Travel Notice ........................................................................................................................... 75 Medical Electronic Equipment ............................................................................................................ 75 SAR Notice ......................................................................................................................................... 75 Wireless Notices ................................................................................................................................. 76 U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice ....................................................................................... 76 Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice ............................................................................... 76 Brazilian Notice .................................................................................................................. 76 Singaporean Wireless Notice ............................................................................................ 76 Japanese Notice ................................................................................................................................. 77 Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices ......................................................................................... 77 vii Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices ......................................................................................... 77 Bluetooth Devices .............................................................................................................. 77 Taiwan DGT Notice ............................................................................................................................ 78 Korean Notice ..................................................................................................................................... 78 Acoustics Warning .............................................................................................................................. 78 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do? ........................................................ 79 I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this? .................................................................... 79 I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do? ............................................................. 79 I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this? ................................................................ 79 I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do? ....................................................................... 79 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call? ........................................................................ 80 Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times? ......................................................................... 80 Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times? .............................................................................. 80 Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen? ................... 80 I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do? ...................................................................... 80 I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do? .......................................................... 80 19 Care and Maintenance Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ .................................................................................................... 81 Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ ............................................................................................... 81 Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ ................................................................................ 81 Guidelines for using accessories ........................................................................................................ 81 Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places ........................................................................... 81 viii 1 Registering the iPAQ Registering your HP iPAQ You need to register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard to be able to:

Access support and services, and get the most out of your HP products Sign up for free support alerts, driver notices, and personalized newsletters Manage your profile In some countries, when you register your HP iPAQ with Hewlett-Packard, you receive e-mail regarding special offers and promotions. Take time now to register your HP iPAQ online at http://www.register.hp.com. NOTE: Registration is not supported in all countries. If your mail or e-mail address needs to be updated after registration, visit http://www.register.hp.com and enter your user ID and registration password to edit your online profile. Registering your HP iPAQ 1 2 Box Contents Box Contents This illustration depicts the items that come in the box with your HP iPAQ. NOTE: Box contents vary by model.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP iPAQ Voice Messenger 1100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Getting Started CD with special software HP iPAQ documentation Wired stereo headset NOTE: Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing loss, do not spend much time listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume. HP recommends use of the headset manufactured by Merry, part number EMC220-X00, that is included with your HP iPAQ.

(6) AC adapter with interchangeable plug NOTE: The AC adapter is provided with more than one interchangeable plug, which may not be attached. Attach the correct plug for your region. Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times.

(7) Mini-USB synchronization cable 2 Chapter 2 Box Contents 3 Components NOTE: Not all models or features are available in all regions. Front Panel Components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11) Display Screen Use to view the contents on the screen. Right Softkey Press to launch HP iPAQ Shortcuts from the Home screen. Power Button or End Key Back Key Keypad Press to end a phone call. Press and hold to switch your HP iPAQ on or off. Press to go back to the previous screen. Use keys on the keypad to enter text, dial numbers, or navigate menus. 4-Way Navigation Key Use to select items, navigate menus, change feature settings, and play games. Scroll up, down, left, or right by pressing down on the button in the direction you want to scroll. Release the button to stop the scrolling action. Home Key Send Key Press to go to the Home screen. Press to answer a call, lock your HP iPAQ, or start the speakerphone. Action Button Press to open an item or a program. Left Softkey Press to access programs from the Start menu. Earpiece Use to listen to phone calls, sounds, and notifications. Front Panel Components 3 Bottom Panel Components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3) Charging/Communications Port Use to connect the mini-USB synchronization and charging cable. Microphone Strap Loop Use for phone conversations or to record notes. Use to attach accessories to carry your HP iPAQ. Left and Right Side Components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Volume Button MicroSD Slot Press to increase or decrease the earpiece volume. Insert a Micro Secure Digital (MicroSD) storage card with the label side down for data storage. Headset Connector Plug the headphones into this connector for a private phone conversation or to listen to music. Make sure that the wired headset is firmly plugged into the headset connector. Voice Commander Button Press to launch the Voice Commander. 4 Chapter 3 Components Back Panel Components Component Function

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Speaker Use the speakers to listen to music or as a speakerphone to converse when driving or otherwise occupied. Release Button Press the release button on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ to remove the back cover. Battery Cover Remove to insert or remove the battery and/or the SIM card. HP Digital Camera Lens With the camera turned on, frame the subject in the camera lens and view it on your HP iPAQ screen before capturing the photo. Back Panel Components 5 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 1: Remove the battery cover and insert the SIM card Press the release button on the battery cover and slide the cover down and away from the HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Remove the battery. NOTE:

is provided by a mobile phone service provider. If the battery is already installed, remove it before inserting the SIM card. The SIM card 3. 4. Place the SIM card in the provided slot. NOTE: Make sure that the metal contacts are facing down and the notched corner is in the correct position. Slide the SIM card into the slot. 6 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 1. 2. Align the battery connectors on the battery with the housing pins in the battery compartment, and insert the battery. Place the battery cover down and slide up until it clicks into place. Step 3: Charge the battery CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, Make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting. The battery provides power for your HP iPAQ to operate. Your HP iPAQ comes with a mini-USB synchronization cable, which must be used to charge the device. It takes approximately 24 hours to fully charge the battery for the first time. Subsequent charges may take longer. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to an electrical outlet. 3. Connect the mini-USB synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on your Insert the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into the port on the AC adapter. HP iPAQ. The cable connector only fits one way. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. Step 2: Install the battery and replace the battery cover 7 TIP: You can also charge the battery by connecting your HP iPAQ to a USB port on your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable. NOTE: Whenever a replacement battery is inserted into your HP iPAQ, press the End key for at least two seconds. In case the device does not switch on, attach an AC adapter to switch on your HP iPAQ. Step 4: Turn on your HP iPAQ Press the Power button or End key to turn on your HP iPAQ. Next, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup. Use the keypad to enter information. Protecting Your HP iPAQ with a Password You can secure the data on your HP iPAQ by setting a password. Each time you turn on your HP iPAQ, you will be prompted to enter the password. To set a password:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Security > Device Lock. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, and select the time that your HP iPAQ must be unused before you are prompted for a password. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use. Enter the password and then confirm the password. Press Done. 4. The next time your HP iPAQ is unused for the specified period of time, you are prompted to enter your password. TIP: Use the same steps as above to change or reset your password. 3. Finding the Serial and Model Number Locate the serial and model number of your HP iPAQ before contacting HP Customer Support, particularly if you are calling for in-warranty support. View the serial and model ID by pressing Start > More > HP Help and Support > Serial and Model Number. You can also find this information below the battery of your HP iPAQ:

To locate the serial and model number:

1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the battery from the unit. 3. Locate the label containing the product ID and serial number underneath the battery. Status Icons The following table lists the common status indicators and their meanings. 8 Chapter 4 Setting Up Your HP iPAQ Icon Status Icon Status Missed call Voice call active No SIM card installed Call forwarding active Call on hold SIM card fault New Voice mail New e-mail or SMS Instant message received Battery level Battery level low Battery charging No battery or battery fault Sync error Ringer off Wi-Fi on Roaming Speaker phone on Bluetooth General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) available GPRS available in roaming GPRS in use Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution (EDGE) available EDGE available in roaming EDGE in use Phone connection unavailable or network error Signal strength Radio off Status Icons 9 5 Learning the Basics Get started with your HP iPAQ by learning basic functions such as entering text, knowing the Home screen, synchronization, and troubleshooting. Home Screen The Home screen displays the date and time and provides a quick status of the remaining battery capacity, upcoming appointments, your current profile, and the number of unread text messages. From the Home screen, scroll and select the cellular carrier and Wi-Fi connection status display module to open the Wireless Manager. Next, press All to turn all wireless connections on/off. At the top of the Home screen are the connectivity icons, the volume indicator, and the clock. The top of the Home screen also displays the icons of the last ten programs you used so that you can quickly recall them. Use the Home screen to do the following:

Access all applications and settings by pressing Start. Access your shortcuts by selecting Shortcuts. Battery Saving Tips You can adjust the settings on your HP iPAQ to fit your individual needs and to help your battery last as long as possible between charges. Here are some recommendations to conserve battery life:

Sounds Every time you are notified of an event, battery power is consumed. Press Start >

Settings > Sounds and turn off any notifications that are unnecessary. Auto Turn Off the Backlight Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. Specify a short amount of time to wait before turning off the backlight. Set Backlight time out on battery to 5 to 10 seconds and Display time out to 30 seconds. Turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Always turn off Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when not in use. HP also offers a variety of accessories to keep your HP iPAQ charged when you are out of the office for extended time periods. These include the mini-USB synchronization cable and travel adapter. Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. To check the battery power, press Start > Settings > Power Management. Locking and Unlocking Your HP iPAQ You can lock your HP iPAQ to prevent accidental key presses and unintentional phone calls while you carry your device. NOTE: When your device is locked, you can still receive phone call notifications and see appointment reminders. To lock your HP iPAQ, press and hold the Send key. To unlock your HP iPAQ, press Unlock and *. Your HP iPAQ is unlocked and ready for use. 10 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics Entering Text You can enter text and numbers on the HP iPAQ using the keypad. The HP iPAQ supports two input modes for entering text: Multipress and T9. The status indicator on the top of the display screen shows the input mode that is currently in use. Changing Input Modes You can change the text mode to Multipress or T9 as follows:

1. Press and hold * until the status indicator for the input mode you want is shown at the top of the display screen. To change options in the Multipress or T9 modes, for example, changes from abc to ABC, or from T9 to t9, press * and release. The following table shows the list of input mode status indicators:

2. Indicator Mode abc Abc ABC t9 T9 T9 The Multipress text input mode, lowercase The Multipress text input mode, initial capital letters The Multipress text input mode, uppercase The T9 text input mode, lowercase The T9 text input mode, initial capital letters The T9 text input mode, uppercase TIP:

In the Multipress or T9 text input mode, the first letter of a sentence is always in uppercase. Entering Text in the Multipress Mode 1. 2. 3. 4. You can enter a letter in the Multipress mode by pressing the number key on which the letter appears. To enter the first letter on the number key, press the key once. To enter the second letter press the key twice, and so on. The letter entered remains underlined until you complete multiple keypresses and the cursor moves to the next position. When you enter letters that are on the same number key, wait until the underline disappears before entering the next letter. This pause is called the Multipress time out, and you can adjust the length of the pause between multiple keypresses. To change the Multipress time out:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > More > Accessibility. Scroll to select the time for entering text in the Multipress mode in Multipress time out box. Press Done. Entering Text 11 Entering Text in the T9 Mode T9 is a predictive text entry mode that lets you enter a word using a single keypress per letter. Entering Common Words To enter common words embedded in the T9 software:

1. Press a key indicating the first letter of the word you want to enter. A list of alternative words and letter combinations will be displayed on the screen. If the word you want is not displayed, continue by entering the second letter. The word choices are updated with each keypress. 2. Entering New Words To enter the first letter of a word, press the required key once. You can add new words that are not recognized by T9. 1. 2. Use the keypad to enter the rest of the word. 3. 4. If the word you want to type is not present in the dictionary, press ADD WORD?. Enter the word in the Add My Word box and press Done. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ stores the unrecognized word and includes it in the list of alternative word choices. When memory space for unrecognized words is filled, your HP iPAQ deletes oldest words as it adds new words. TIP: You can also enter numbers and symbols in messages. Entering the Owner Information Enter your information so that the HP iPAQ can be returned to you if it is lost. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > Owner Information. Enter your personal information and press Done. Viewing the Operating System Information Press Start > Settings > More > About. TIP: You can also press Start > More > Accessories > Resource Manager to view System Information. Changing the Regional Settings The style in which language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display are displayed is specified in regional settings. To change the regional settings:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > Regional Settings. Select your region. The region you select determines the available options. 12 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics To customize additional settings, select the appropriate options. Press Done. 3. 4. To change the language, locale, numbers, date, time, and currency display, follow steps 1 through 4 above, and then perform one of the following:

From the Language list, select the language. From the Locale list, select the locale. From the Short date style/Long date style lists, select the date format. From the Time format list, select the time display option. From the Positive number/Negative number lists, select the number display options. From the Positive currency/Negative currency lists, select the currency display options. Adjusting the Volume Setting the Ringtone You can also specify the sound you want to hear for any notification. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Select an event name and choose how you want to be notified by selecting the appropriate option. You can choose from several options, such as a special sound for Reminders, New text messages, Ring tone, Internet call ring tone, New voice message, New instant message, SIM toolkit messages, Exclamation, Question, New channel message, New e-mail, Alarm clock, Warnings, and Keypad control. Press Done. 3. NOTE: Turning off notifications helps conserve battery power. Adjusting Speaker Volume Use the Volume button to increase or decrease the speaker volume. Changing the Power Management Settings 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. Select Display time out. Select the length of time. Press Done. Dimming or Adjusting the Brightness of the Backlight You can set the backlight to dim after a specified amount of time has elapsed. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. Select Backlight time out on battery or Backlight time out on AC. Adjusting the Volume 13 Select the length of time. Press Done. 3. 4. You can also increase or decrease the brightness of the backlight. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > More > Power Management. Scroll and increase or decrease the brightness from Brightness list. Press Done. Installing and Removing Programs To install programs on your HP iPAQ:

1. Use the mini-USB synchronization cable to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. 2. 3. Check the screen of your HP iPAQ to see if any further steps are necessary to complete the Follow the instructions in the Installation Wizard provided with the program you want to install. program installation. To remove programs from your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. NOTE: By removing a program from your HP iPAQ, you may increase available memory on the device. Press Start > Settings > Remove Programs. Select the programs you want to remove and then press Menu > Remove. If programs are lost from your HP iPAQ for any reason, most of them can be re-installed using Microsoft ActiveSync. Open the ActiveSync help on your computer, click Tools > Add/Remove Programs. Select the program to be added and click OK. Opening and Closing Programs You do not need to exit a program to open another or to conserve memory. The system manages memory automatically. To open a program, press Start and then select the program you want from the list. In most cases, programs automatically stop to free required memory space. However, you can close programs manually, if you prefer. 1. 2. Press Start > More > Accessories > Task Manager. From the Application list, select the application you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Menu > Kill All to close all open applications. Customizing the HP iPAQ To get detailed information:

Press Start > Settings > More > About. The device name is used to identify the HP iPAQ in the following situations:

Synchronizing with a computer Connecting to a network 14 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a unique NOTE:

name. To change the device name:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > Owner Information. Enter a name in the Device Name box. The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z and numbers from 0 to 9. Press Done. Setting Alarms 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm > Alarm. Scroll to Alarm time and set the alarm time. Scroll and select the required option from the Alarm list. Press Done. Creating and Assigning a Category In the Contacts and Tasks programs, you can use categories to help organize and group your contacts and tasks. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

From the list, select an existing item or create a new one. For an existing item in Tasks, open the task and press Edit > Categories. For an existing item in Contacts, press Menu > Edit > Categories. For a new item in Contacts and Tasks, select Categories. 3. Enter the category name and then press Done. The new category is automatically assigned to the item. Press Done to return to the contact or task. 4. NOTE: Categories are shared between your contacts and tasks. A category remains in the list of shared categories as long as it is assigned to at least one contact or task. Synchronization Microsoft ActiveSync, located on the Getting Started CD, allows your HP iPAQ and your computer to communicate with each other. For synchronization to work properly, install Microsoft ActiveSync on your computer before you connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Use Microsoft ActiveSync to:

Synchronize information between your HP iPAQ and up to two computers or one server so that you have the latest information in all locations Change synchronization settings and the synchronization schedule Transfer files between your device and computer Setting Alarms 15 Install applications on your HP iPAQ Synchronize links Send and receive e-mail Request meetings Synchronizing your HP iPAQ with your computer allows you to keep the same information (such as calendar, contacts, and e-mail messages) on both units, making it available when you work on your computer or when you take your HP iPAQ on the go. You can synchronize your HP iPAQ with your computer using:

mini-USB synchronization cable To synchronize your HP iPAQ and your computer using the mini-USB synchronization cable:

1. Make sure ActiveSync 4.5 or later is installed on your computer. 2. 3. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the universal synchronize connector on Plug the USB end of the mini-USB synchronization cable into your computer. Bluetooth the bottom of your HP iPAQ. Synchronization begins automatically. CAUTION: To avoid damaging your HP iPAQ or the AC adapter, check to make sure all connectors are properly aligned before connecting them. 4. Click Next on the Synchronization Setup Wizard screen. 5. Perform one of the following:

By default, the check box is selected to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange Server. Clear this check box if you do not want to synchronize directly with a Microsoft Exchange server and then click Next. Click Next if you want to synchronize directly with Microsoft Outlook. 6. When the Synchronization Options screen displays, select the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer and then click Next. After your items have been synchronized, click Finish. The Synchronization Setup Wizard starts synchronizing the items you selected. 7. If ActiveSync does not begin the synchronization process, start it manually: On your computer, open ActiveSync by selecting Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Changing the Type of ActiveSync Connection You can change the type of ActiveSync connection being used between your HP iPAQ and your computer to meet your specific needs. You should use USB Serial Sync mode if you:

Are having general problems with the ActiveSync connection between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Need to connect your HP iPAQ to your computer while you are using a Virtual Private Network

(VPN) tunnel from your computer. Are running personal or company-enforced firewall software on your computer. 16 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics You should use USB RNDIS mode if you are transferring large files and do not have any connection issues between your HP iPAQ and your computer. To change to ActiveSync RNDIS mode on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > More > USB. Press Menu > ActiveSync Settings. Scroll and select RNDIS. Press Done. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues Following is a list of symptoms that may indicate synchronization issues:

No ActiveSync chimes sound (or a gray icon displays), and there is no activity in the ActiveSync window on your computer. ActiveSync chimes sound, and the ActiveSync icon on your computer changes to a swirling green icon. The retrieving settings message appears on your computer, but the ActiveSync connection drops prior to establishing the partnership. ActiveSync is searching for a connection but cannot establish one. (The green icon on your computer continues to spin.) Synchronization has been established between your HP iPAQ and computer but connection is dropped. (The green icon on your computer stops spinning and grays out.) Firewall or other network protection software message box is displayed for ActiveSync to access the network or Internet. Following is a list of troubleshooting tips if you experience difficulty while synchronizing your HP iPAQ and computer. Try the following solutions to troubleshoot any synchronization issues:

Check the Operating System (OS) on your computer before you begin synchronizing information between your HP iPAQ and computer. The synchronization method varies depending on the OS running on the computer. If your computer is running Windows XP or an earlier version, synchronization settings are managed through Microsoft ActiveSync. Microsoft ActiveSync 4.5 is available on the Getting Started CD. You may also visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile for more information or to download Microsoft ActiveSync. If your computer is running Windows Vista, synchronization settings are managed through Windows Mobile Device Center. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile to download Windows Mobile Device Center. NOTE: HP does not guarantee the accurate functionality of any third party applications with Windows Vista. If you are running ActiveSync 4.5 or later and personal firewall software on your computer, please add ActiveSync to the firewall program's exception list.

(Firewall software, such as Sygate Personal Firewall, TrendMicro PC-cillin Internet Security 2005, Norton Personal Firewall, McAfee Personal Firewall, or Zone Alarm Security Suite may block synchronization.) Refer to the documentation that came with your firewall program to determine how to add ActiveSync 4.5 or later to the program's exception list. To further troubleshoot a firewall application and enable ActiveSync 4.5 or later, visit: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile. Troubleshooting Help for Synchronization Issues 17 During the ActiveSync installation, if you inadvertently left the Microsoft Exchange Server option box checked and are not planning to connect to an Exchange server, follow these steps:

Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Make sure an ActiveSync connection is established. On your computer, click Start > All Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Click Tools > Options. Clear the boxes for the sync items listed under the Server group. Place a check mark in the boxes under the Computer group for those items you want to synchronize. Disconnect your HP iPAQ from your computer and wait for the ActiveSync message confirming that your device is no longer connected. Reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Wait to see if your HP iPAQ connects to your computer. On your computer, in ActiveSync, select File > Connection Settings. Confirm that USB is selected as a potential connection method. Connect your HP iPAQ to a different USB port on your computer. Check your mini-USB synchronization cable. Consider using another mini-USB synchronization cable if one is available to you. Try synchronizing via a Bluetooth connection. Refer to the printed or CD-based documentation that came with your HP iPAQ for specific instructions. Once your computer and HP iPAQ restart, reconnect your HP iPAQ to your computer. Uninstall ActiveSync from your computer and then reinstall it. To uninstall ActiveSync from your computer, click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. Then click Remove > Yes. After trying the above solutions without any success in solving your connection problem, perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ using the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant. You can reinstall your applications on your HP iPAQ after the hard or clean reset is complete by using ActiveSync on your computer. After your HP iPAQ is synchronized properly, go to ActiveSync on your computer and select Tools > Add/Remove Programs, and then select any programs you want to reinstall. 18 Chapter 5 Learning the Basics 6 Using Your Smartphone Using the Home Key You can use the Home key to return to the Home screen from any application. You can do the following tasks using the Home key:

Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. The Quick List displays a list of available profile types and commands. Press the Home key and use the keypad to dial a number. Using the Back key The Back key is used to return to the previous screen. It is similar to stepping up a folder structure in your computer. Using the 4-Way Navigation Key The 4-Way Navigation key is used to navigate the menu system, change feature settings, and play games. It is also used to scroll up and down a list to select a desired function. TIP: Down and up are your primary movements within menus and navigation through the contacts. Move left and right to change feature settings and edit text. The top of the Home screen displays the icons of the last ten programs you used so that you can quickly recall them. Press the Action button to open any program. Calling Features Making a Call 1. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to call. 2. TIP: To call the person whom you called last, press the Send key twice. Press the Send key to make the call. Answering a Call To answer a call, press the Send key or press Answer on the screen. When you receive a call, you can answer or ignore the call, the phone stops ringing and the caller may be sent to Voice mail, depending on the settings provided by your mobile phone service provider. To disregard the call, press Ignore on the onscreen keypad or press the End Call key. Using Call Waiting Use Call Waiting to be notified of incoming calls when you are in another call. Using the Home Key 19 Press Start > Settings > Phone > Call Waiting. Select the Provide call waiting notifications check box. Press Done to save the settings. To turn on Call Waiting:

1. 2. 3. To use Call Waiting to answer an incoming call during a phone conversation:

1. 2. Press Answer to move the current phone call to Call Waiting. Press the Send key to answer the incoming call or press Ignore on the onscreen keypad if you do not want to answer the call. Press Swap to switch between the calls. 3. Redialing a Number To redial the last number called from the Home screen, press the Send key twice. Calling a Contact You can call a number stored in the contact list. As you enter a contact name, the HP iPAQ searches the Contacts, Call History, Speed Dial lists, and the SIM card to find a matching name and number. Making a Call from the Home Screen To make calls from the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to enter the contact name. 2. 3. In case there is more than one contact with the same name, scroll to select the required contact. Press the Send key to make the call. Making a Call from the Contacts You can select a person's name from your contacts list and press the Send key to place the call. If a contact has more than one phone number, such as Work, Home, and Fax, do the following:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact name. Scroll to the required number and press the Send key to place a call. TIP:

searches the entire contacts list to display the name. If you have a long list of contacts, enter the first few letters of a contact's name. Your HP iPAQ Changing the Default Number for a Contact The Work phone number is set as the default. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll a contact number. Scroll and select to change default number. 20 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Making a Call to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the contact you want to call. Press the Action button and scroll to the number you want to call. Press the Send key to place the call. Making a Call Using Voice Commander Press Voice Commander button and say Call (Contact name) to dial a number saved in your HP iPAQ's contacts list or by saying Digit Dial (number) to directly call a number not stored in your HP iPAQ. Making Emergency Calls You can make calls to emergency service numbers, even if you have locked the SIM card and/or the HP iPAQ. Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911 or 112, which you can call under any circumstance, even when your HP iPAQ is locked or the SIM card is not inserted. NOTE: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your HP iPAQ's preprogrammed emergency number(s) may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. From the Home screen:

1. Use the keypad to dial the local emergency number. 2. Press the Send key to place the call. Making Calls Using Speed Dials You can quickly dial phone numbers by assigning speed dial numbers. Press and hold one or two keys from the Home screen to make a speed dial call. You can choose speed dial entries from 299. The speed dial entry 1 is often reserved to set up or dial your Voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: The Speed Dial feature is available only for phone numbers stored in the Contacts list. Press Start > Contacts. Scroll to the desired contact and press the Action button. Scroll to the desired number and press Menu > Add to Speed Dial to open menu functions. To create a speed dial shortcut:

1. 2. 3. 4. Use navigation keys to select a speed dial number from 299 under Keypad assignment. 5. TIP: You can also assign speed dial numbers to Web addresses and e-mail addresses that are stored in the Contacts on your HP iPAQ. To make a speed dial call:

From the Home screen, press and hold the keypad number you assigned as a speed dial entry. For two-digit speed dial numbers, press the first digit and press and hold the second digit of the number. Press Done. Calling Features 21 Using Voice mail From the Home Screen:

Press and hold 1 to automatically call Voice mail after initial setup. NOTE: You may need to set up the Voice mail shortcut. Using the Handsfree Function You can turn the speaker on during a call to use the handsfree function. 1. 2. Press Menu to open the menu options. Scroll to Speakerphone and press the Action button to turn the speaker on and the earpiece off. Monitoring Phone Usage Call Timers store the length of your last call, the total number of calls made and received, calls by type, and a lifetime counter. You can use Call Timers to keep track of your calling patterns, to help you choose a calling plan or estimate your monthly billing. Press Start > Call History > Menu > View Timers. Making Data Calls Use Data Connections settings to set up General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), dial-up, Virtual Private Network (VPN), proxy, and Wi-Fi connections so you can connect to the Internet or your corporate network. With a data connection, you can browse the Web, download e-mail, chat using MSN Messenger, or synchronize with the server without using wires. Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the data call by pressing End. This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. NOTE: Your HP iPAQ has already been configured to allow you to browse and chat. Contact your service provider for information on mobile Internet plans, configuring e-mail or wireless synchronizing with the server. Muting a Call You can mute the microphone during an active call. On making a call the other party will not be able to hear anything you say, but you can still hear the other party. During a call:

Press Mute. Putting a Call on Hold During a call, you can put the call on hold so you can call another number or answer an incoming call. If you have more than one call on the line, you can switch between calls. To put a call on hold, press Menu and then select Hold. To switch between calls, press Swap. 22 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Making a Conference Call Press the Send key. Press the Send key. After you are connected, press Hold. You can talk to two or more people simultaneously, using the conference call facility. 1. 2. Use the keypad to dial the first number. 3. 4. 5. Dial the second number, and then press the Send key. 6. NOTE: To add more parties to the conference call, dial each number, connect, and then press Menu > Conference. After you are connected, press Menu > Conference. Making a Call From a Hyperlinked Phone Number Use a hyperlinked phone number to quickly dial a phone number from an e-mail or text message. A hyperlinked phone number is underlined in the same manner as a Web site address. From an e-mail or text message containing a hyperlinked phone number:

1. 2. Scroll to the hyperlinked phone number. Press the Action button to place the call. Dialing International Numbers You can make an international call from your HP iPAQ. To make an international call, enter the country code before the phone number. 1. On the Home screen, press and hold 0 until the plus (+) sign appears. 2. Enter the country code and phone number. NOTE: You can also insert a plus (+) sign into a contact's phone number for quick dialing. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength After you insert an active SIM card into your HP iPAQ, it connects to your service provider's network. The signal strength icon indicates that you are connected to your service provider's network. A full strength connection is indicated by a full signal strength icon. The number of vertical bars in the icon diminish as the signal strength diminishes. No bars indicate no signal. Changing the SIM Personal Identification Number The SIM Personal Identification Number (PIN) protects your HP iPAQ against unauthorized access. You can assign a password to protect your device and information. Your first PIN comes from your wireless service provider. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Security. Select Change PIN2. Enter your current PIN in Old PIN box. Checking Your Connection and Signal Strength 23 Enter your new PIN in New PIN box. 4. 5. Confirm your new PIN in Confirm new PIN box. 6. Press Done. Managing Calls Using Call History Call History provides the time and duration of all incoming, outgoing, and missed calls, a summary of total calls, and has easy access to notes taken during a call. Press Start > Call History to view all of the calls in Call History. Press Menu > Filter and select a different view to change the Call History view. Press Menu > View Timers > Menu > Reset Timers, to reset the Recent calls counter. NOTE: The All Calls counter cannot be reset. Press Menu > Delete Lists to clear the entire Call History. Using Wireless Manager Using Wireless Manager, you can easily turn on/off the functions of a Wi-Fi connection, a Bluetooth connection, and Phone features. NOTE: When the Phone feature is turned off, you cannot receive or make a call, including emergency calls. To receive and make a call, turn on the Phone feature and re-engage your phone's RF capability. To use wireless manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Option All Wi-Fi Description Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Phone features. Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Wi-Fi connection. Bluetooth Press the Action button to turn on/ off the functions of Bluetooth connection. Phone Press the Action button to turn on/off the functions of Phone features. Flight mode is a condition when all wireless connections on your HP iPAQ are turned off. To turn on/off all wireless connections at the same time:

1. 2. To use Wireless Manager, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. Select All and press the Action button to turn on/off all wireless connections. Quick Launch Quick Launch is a simple way for you to open the Quick List that lets you turn off your HP iPAQ, manage wireless connections, change profiles, or lock your keypad. To access the Quick List:

1. 2. Press and hold the Home key to access the Quick List. Scroll to select from the list. 24 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type Change the ring tone and type to select a different sound to notify you of incoming calls. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Sounds. Scroll and select a ring tone from the Ring tone box. Press Done. Changing Network Settings You can switch from one network to other as follows:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Phone. Select Networks to view your Current network, or Network selection to switch to a different network. TIP: You can select a different network by searching the network either automatically or manually. Profiles You can use profiles on your HP iPAQ to personalize the ringtones, ring volumes, and other settings according to your choice. Using profiles To select a profile:

1. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. TIP: You can also set profiles using Voice Commander. 2. Select any of the listed profiles and press Done to choose that profile. Editing profiles To edit a profile:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Profiles. Press Menu > Edit. Scroll and select to edit the following features in a profile:

Name Ring type Ring volume Alarm type Alarm volume Reminder type Reminder volume Changing the Ring Tone and Ring Type 25 Notification type System sound volume Automatic Frequency Band Selection Your HP iPAQ has an integrated Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM)/General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)/Enhanced Data for GSM Evolution (EDGE) feature that supports four different frequency bands (850/900/1800/1900) for international roaming. When traveling, between countries and/or wireless network operators, this feature changes the connection settings by generating an automatic search for frequency bands when your home bands are not available. This feature is the default setting on your HP iPAQ. To avoid connection problems after you are out of the country, follow these tips before you leave:

Visit your mobile phone service provider's Web site to see if service is available where you are traveling. Verify your mobile phone account is set up for international roaming and if additional charges apply. Copying a Contact From a SIM to a Device You can copy a contact from the SIM to the device as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Press Menu > Copy Contact. Press Menu > Edit to edit the contact information as needed. Press Done. ActiveSync Synchronizing Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and E-mail with Exchange/Outlook You can synchronize Contacts, Tasks, Calendar and E-mail with Exchange/Outlook 1. After your computer is synchronized with your HP iPAQ, click Tools > Options on the Microsoft ActiveSync dialog box. Select the check boxes which you want to synchronize. 2. 3. Click OK. Setting up E-mail Before sending and receiving e-mail messages, you may have to complete the e-mail account setup. You can send e-mail messages by synchronizing or connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a corporate network. You can only have one configurable Outlook e-mail at one time and therefore only synchronize one type of e-mail, either POP3 or computer. If you choose to synchronize your computer e-mail, it will wipe out your POP3 settings. To set up an e-mail account, press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Options Your name Description Type your name 26 Chapter 6 Using Your Smartphone E-mail address Enter your e-mail address Automatic setup Select this feature to enable your HP iPAQ to obtain e-mail settings from the internet. User name Password Enter your user name Enter your password Domain (if necessary) Enter your domain name, if necessary Save password Check this feature to avoid entering your password repeatedly before you send/receive e-mails. Server type Select either POP3 or IMAP4 Account name Enter your account name Network Select The Internet Incoming Server Enter your incoming mail server Require SSL connection Check this feature, if necessary Outgoing Server Enter your outgoing mail server Outgoing server requires authentication Download the following messages Connect automatically and check for messages Check this feature, if necessary Use navigation keys to select messages you want to receive Use navigation keys to select an option Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Scroll and select the Exchange Server option from the Your e-mail Source box. Press Next to synchronize outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain on the User Information tab. Select the check box for the items you want to synchronize, and press Finish. Voice Notes You can use Voice recorder to record audio clips. You can attach them as voice notes to e-mails, MMS, and meeting notes. Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server 27 7 Connections You can use your HP iPAQ to connect to and exchange information with other handheld devices, your computer, various network types, or the Internet. There are several ways to get connected, including:

Wi-Fi Bluetooth GPRS/EDGE Press Start > Settings > Connections to access all these connection types. Connecting to Intranet URLs To connect to intranet sites that have periods in their URLs (for example, intranet.companyname.com), add them to the Work URL Exceptions list. 1. 2. 3. NOTE:

individually by entering *.companyname.com. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter the URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Press Menu > Add and in in URL Pattern, enter the intranet URL. If you use many URLs that share the same root company name, you can avoid entering them Changing or Deleting an Intranet URL 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Press Menu > Advanced. To enter an URL, press Menu > Work URL Exceptions. Select the intranet URL you want to change, and then press Menu > Edit to edit. Press Delete to delete the URL. Setting Up Proxy Settings If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or private network during synchronization, your device should download proper proxy settings during synchronization from your computer. If these settings are not on your computer or need to be changed, you can change them manually. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your ISP or network administrator:

User name Password Proxy Server name Port Type of Socks protocol used 28 Chapter 7 Connections To set up proxy server settings:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Proxy. Press Menu > Add to set up a new proxy server connection. Press Menu > Edit to edit a proxy server. Scroll to select the required option from the Connects from list. Scroll to select the The Internet option from the Connects to list. In the Proxy (name:port) box, enter the proxy server name and port. Scroll to select the required protocol option from the Type list. 3. 4. 5. 6. Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To set up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Scroll to select your country from the Country list. Scroll to select your operator from the Operator list. Press Menu > Save to save your operator and country settings. Your HP iPAQ will automatically create a new GPRS connection using your operator settings. Configuring Advanced Proxy Settings 1. 2. For the appropriate server type, enter the proxy server name and port. If you are configuring a Socks proxy, select Socks4 or Socks5. If using Socks5, enter the credentials for connecting with your proxy server. Setting Up a VPN Connection A Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, via the Internet. Before you begin, obtain the following information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To set up a VPN server connection:

1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections. Select VPN and press the Action button. Setting Up GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect 29 3. 4. Enter the details given by the network administrator. To edit details of an already existing VPN connection, scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Edit. NOTE: To delete an existing connection scroll to select the connection and press Menu > Delete. Wi-Fi With wireless access, you do not need to use cables to connect your HP iPAQ to the Internet. Instead, access points transmit data to and from your wireless device. Your HP iPAQ can connect to an 802.11b/g WLAN or connect directly to other WLAN-enabled devices. With Wi-Fi you can:

Access the Internet Send and receive e-mail Access corporate network information Use Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) for secure remote access Use hotspots for wireless connectivity NOTE: Use of dial-up and wireless Internet, e-mail, corporate networks, and other wireless communications, such as Bluetooth devices, may require separately purchased additional hardware and other compatible equipment, in addition to a standard Wi-Fi infrastructure and a separately purchased service contract. Check with your service provider for availability and coverage in your area. Wi-Fi Terms Term 802.11 standard Definition An approved standard specification of radio technology from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used for wireless local area networks (WLANs). Device-to-computer or ad-hoc A mode that does not use access points. It provides independent peer-to-peer connectivity in a wireless LAN. Domain Name System (DNS) The way that Internet domain names are located and translated into IP addresses. It is an easy to remember name for an Internet address. Every Web site has its own specific IP address on the Internet. Encryption Hotspots An alphanumeric (letters and/or numbers) conversion process of data primarily used for protection against any unauthorized people. Public or private areas where you can access Wi-Fi service. These wireless connections can be located, for example, at a library, cyber cafe, hotel, airport lounge, or convention center. This service can be free or sometimes requires a fee. Infrastructure This connection mode uses wireless access points to connect to networks. Automatically Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When you turn on the Wi-Fi radio, your HP iPAQ automatically detects Wi-Fi networks that are broadcasting their signals. If your Wi-Fi network is not set to broadcast, then you have to connect to it 30 Chapter 7 Connections Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. manually. Before trying to connect to a Wi-Fi network, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. 2. On the Home screen, scroll and select Wi-Fi to open Wireless Manager. 3. 4. Scroll and select Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi on. After your HP iPAQ detects any existing Wi-Fi network, select the network you want to connect to and press Connect. Manually Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network Press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi > New. Enter the network name. 1. 2. 3. Choose a network type. Select Internet to connect to the Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or select Private/Work Network to connect to a company network. You should only choose Private/Work if the network requires a proxy server. Press Next to go to the Network Key screen. 4. To use authentication, select the authentication method from the Authentication list. To use data encryption, select an encryption method from the Data encryption list. To automatically use a network key, select the The key is automatically provided check box. Else, enter the network key. NOTE: To delete a Wi-Fi connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Finding an IP Address You need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network to find the IP address of your connection 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > More > Wireless LAN. Press Menu > Advanced to find the IP address and network related details of your connection. Deleting a Wireless Network Connection You can delete networks you manually entered. However, if a network was automatically detected, you cannot delete it. To delete an existing or available wireless network:

1. 2. To delete a connection, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi. Select the required connection and press Menu > Delete. Wi-Fi 31 Configuring 802.1x Authentication Settings 802.1x authentication settings provide a method to protect the network behind the access point from intruders as well as provide for dynamic keys and strengthen Wi-Fi encryption. Before performing these steps, determine if authentication information is needed by contacting your network administrator. 1. 2. 3. To manually enter information, press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi. Select the network you want to configure and press Menu > Edit. Press Next twice to reach the 802.1x screen. Press Use IEEE 802.1x network access control, and then select appropriate EAP type. Configuring IP PBX using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Scroll and select the required option from the Use Internet Calling box. You need to configure the Wi-Fi settings before you can use VoIP. You can make voice calls using VoIP and Internet Protocol Private Branch Exchange (IP PBX) in addition to normal GSM calls. VoIP routes voice conversations using an IP based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. To make calls using IP PBX:

1. On the Home screen, scroll to Internet Calling, which is off by default, and press the Action button. 2. 3. 4. On the Home screen, the Internet Calling status changes to available or selected. 5. Use the keypad to enter the number you want to dial and press the Send key. NOTE: On the Home, if the status of Internet Calling is No Service, it indicates that your HP iPAQ did not register successfully with the IP PBX server. To configure VoIP using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant:

1. Download and install the HP iPAQ Setup Assistant from the Getting Started CD before you begin the configuration. 2. Open HP iPAQ Setup Assistant and click Manage Configuration > New. 3. Click VoIP to configure the settings 4. Enter the username and password for your SIP/VoIP account. Enter the Domain name and the Service Provider if available. Enter the SIP Server name or IP address as provided by your network administrator in SIP Proxy box. NOTE: Select Register With SIP Proxy checkbox if you want to use SIP Proxy as your SIP registrar. After you enter the SIP Proxy, you do not have to enter the SIP Registrar again. Enter the Voice mail Number (optional) which is provided with your account. 5. 6. Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to connect to any computer or any other compatible device without using cables. 32 Chapter 7 Connections Bluetooth Terms Term Authentication Authorization Bonding (Paired devices) Device address Device discovery Device ID Encryption Passkey Definition Verification of a numeric passkey before a connection or activity can be completed. Approval of a connection, access, or activity before it can be completed. Creating a trusted connection between your device and another. After a bond is created, the two devices become paired. A paired device does not require authentication or authorization. Unique electronic address of a Bluetooth device. Location and recognition of another Bluetooth device. Name that a Bluetooth device provides when discovered by another device. Method of protecting data. Code you enter to authenticate connections or activities requested by other devices. Personal Information Manager

(PIM) Collection of programs used to manage daily business tasks (for example: Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks). Profiles Collection of Bluetooth settings. Service discovery Determination of which programs you have in common with other devices. Changing Bluetooth Settings 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Scroll and select the bluetooth connection for which you want to change the settings. Follow the on screen instructions and press Done. Bluetooth Device Profiles The functions that Bluetooth supports are called services or profiles. You can communicate only with Bluetooth devices that support at least one of the following profiles:

ActiveSyncUses SPP to connect to ActiveSync on a computer Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Personal Area Networking (PAN) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Hands Free Profile (HFP) Headset Support Profile (HSP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Object Exchange (OBEX) Protocol Object Push Protocol (OPP) Serial Port Profile (SPP) Bluetooth 33 Creating, Accepting, and Ending a Bluetooth Partnership You can create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and another device that has Bluetooth capabilities. After you do this, the devices must have Bluetooth turned on but do not need to be discoverable to exchange information between them. 1. Make sure the two devices are turned on, discoverable, and within 10 meters from each other. 2. 3. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. To create a new partnership press Add New Device. Your HP iPAQ searches for other devices with Bluetooth capabilities and displays them in the list. Select the name of the other device you want to create a partnership with and press Next. Specify a Passkey for authentication. Enter the same Passkey on the other device. Press Done. 4. 5. 6. 7. NOTE: Press Menu > Edit to rename a partnership. To end a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth to view all the partnerships you created on your HP iPAQ. Scroll and select the connection you want to delete. Press Menu > Delete. 2. To accept a Bluetooth partnership:

1. Make sure your device is turned on, discoverable, and within close range. 2. When prompted to accept a partnership with the device that is requesting the relationship, press Yes. If a passkey is requested, enter an alphanumeric Passkey between 1 and 16 characters in Passkey box, and press Next. Enter the same Passkey in the device requesting the partnership. Using a Passkey provides greater security. To give the partnership a more meaningful name, change the name of the device in Display Name. Press Done. 5. If you cannot discover another device, try the following:

Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Move closer to the device. Make sure the device you are attempting to connect to is switched on and is in the discoverable 3. 4. Making a Device Discoverable Press Start > Setting > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Turn On Visibility. mode. 1. 2. NOTE:

If you no longer want your HP iPAQ to be discoverable, press Menu > Turn Off Visibility. 34 Chapter 7 Connections Setting Up an Incoming or Outgoing COM Port 1. Make sure your HP iPAQ is connected to the other device via Bluetooth. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth. Press Menu > Com Ports to set up a new port. Press Menu > New Outgoing Port. NOTE: A new Outgoing Port is available only if there is at least one Bluetooth device supporting serial (COM) connection. Select a numbered COM port from the list. NOTE: A port is in use if it cannot be created; if so then select a different numbered port. To limit communication on this COM port only to devices with which your HP iPAQ has a Bluetooth partnership, select the Secure connection check box. Press Done. 5. 6. 7. Ending a Connection It can be useful to end a connection when you are done using it. This frees resources on your HP iPAQ and can save connection charges. When connected via mini-USB synchronization cable, detach your HP iPAQ from the cable. When connected via Bluetooth, press Start > Settings > Connections > Bluetooth and then press Menu > Turn off Bluetooth to end a bluetooth connection. When connected via Wi-Fi , press Start > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi and then press Menu > Turn off Wi-Fi to end a Wi-Fi connection. GPRS/EDGE EDGE technology provides a connection to the mobile phone network that can be used for Web browsing, Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) messaging, or accessing your corporate network. NOTE: EDGE is an enhancement to GPRS and enables higher speed data connections than GPRS. This means with EDGE, your HP iPAQ can have faster phone multimedia capabilities such as sending and receiving SMS/MMS messages, and sharing video clips. Your HP iPAQ supports GPRS. If you want to HP iPAQ to support EDGE technologies, contact your service provider. Changing GPRS Network Settings The first time you use your SIM Card, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application automatically detects the phone network and operator and sets up the GPRS connection information for you. You can change these settings or create your own network settings to your requirements. 1. 2. Press Start > Settings > Connections > GPRS. If your operator name appears in the list, select the name and press Menu > Edit to edit the GPRS network settings. Editing Network Parameters CAUTION: Editing network parameters is not recommended unless you are being assisted by your mobile phone service provider. GPRS/EDGE 35 Connecting to a Laptop You can use your HP iPAQ as a wireless modem. The Internet Sharing software on your HP iPAQ guides you during the connection process. Insert a GPRS-enabled SIM into your HP iPAQ before setting up Internet Sharing. You may also need to install the software drivers (located on the Getting Started CD) on to your laptop. Before you can begin Internet sharing, make sure you have a cellular connection. If you do not have an active connection, you will not be able to launch the Internet Sharing application. To Connect to a Laptop using a USB Data Connection You may need to install the USB driver before connecting to your computer. If your computer has automatically added your HP iPAQ as a new modem, you can skip the following steps:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using the mini-USB synchronization data cable. Your computer may prompt you for the wireless USB modem driver with a New hardware wizard menu screen. Else proceed to To set up a USB modem connection. 2. Click Next on the welcome screen of the Install Wizard. 3. 4. Select the Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) option. Select Specify a Location and browse to the C:\ drive folder that contains the USB driver. NOTE: Click Next to allow your computer to automatically search and download the USB driver file. 5. Click Finish. 6. After installing the driver, Smartphone USB Modem will be added to the device list in the Device Manager. 7. Next, disconnect your HP iPAQ from the computer. NOTE: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56 Kbps from a compatible service provider. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. Setting Up a USB modem connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. 2. Scroll and select USB from the PC Connection list. 3. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 4. 5. Now connect your HP iPAQ to your computer with the mini-USB synchronization data cable and press Connect. To Connect to a Laptop using Bluetooth data connection For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. Setting Up a Bluetooth Modem Connection:

1. Make sure that your HP iPAQ is not connected to your computer. 2. Press Start > More > Internet Sharing. 36 Chapter 7 Connections Scroll and select Bluetooth PAN from the PC Connection list. Scroll and select the type of GPRS connection you want to use from the Network Connection list. 3. 4. 5. Make your HP iPAQ visible and detectable. Connect the Bluetooth PAN to your computer and create a partnership between them. Press Connect after the partnership is established. 6. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth You can use your HP iPAQ to communicate with your computer and manage your pictures, data and music folders easily. To use ActiveSync over cable:

1. Connect the USB end of the synchronization cable to a USB port on your computer. 2. Connect the mini-USB end of the synchronization cable to the charging/communications port on the bottom of your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The connector fits only one way so do not force it. If the connector does not insert easily, turn it over. 3. When prompted, check the items you want to synchronize between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Select the folder you want to synchronize. 4. 5. Click Explore on the computer ActiveSync dialog box to explore folders present on your HP iPAQ. 6. NOTE: To configure ActiveSync over GPRS, contact your corporate network administrator. Press Sync to synchronize the selected folders. To use ActiveSync over Bluetooth:

NOTE: For best results, connect your HP iPAQ to the computer using a mini-USB synchronization cable to establish a synchronization relationship before connecting via Bluetooth. 1. Follow the instructions in ActiveSync Help for configuring Bluetooth on your computer to support ActiveSync. 2. On your HP iPAQ, press Start > More > ActiveSync. 3. Press Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the device and the computer are within close range. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth, complete the Bluetooth wizard on your HP iPAQ and set up a Bluetooth partnership with the computer. Use ActiveSync Help to do this. Press Sync. After you finish synchronization, press Menu > Disconnect Bluetooth. 4. 5. ActiveSync over USB cable, GPRS and Bluetooth 37 8 Camera Using the Digital Camera Use the built-in digital camera on your HP iPAQ to click and view photos. Capturing Photos Press Start > Camera. You can capture images and store them in your HP iPAQ or memory card. 1. 2. Use the 4-Way Navigation key to zoom in or out. 3. Use the 4-Way Navigation key to decrease or increase brightness. 4. Press the Action button to click a photo and automatically save it in File Manager > My Documents > My Pictures. Viewing Photos Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. To view photos captured on your HP iPAQ:

1. 2. Navigate to a required folder. 3. To Change Image Sizes Press Open to open a folder and press View to view a photo Press the Action button once to the display photo in Full screen view. NOTE: The opened photo displays in the Fit to View screen by default. Press the Action button once while in Full screen view to display the photo in actual view. Press the Action button once while in actual view to return to the fit to screen view. NOTE: You can create folders to manage your pictures. Press Menu > Edit > New Folder to create a new folder. Changing Camera Settings Changing Brightness Settings Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > Brightness. 1. 2. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. 38 Chapter 8 Camera Changing Resolution Settings Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > Resolution. 1. 2. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The Resolution settings can be changed to:

176*144 352*288 320*240 640*480 1280*1024 NOTE: The larger the resolution you choose, the more the storage space required and it may take longer to send such photos by Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS), e-mail, or Bluetooth. Changing Mode Settings Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > Mode. 1. 2. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Mode settings can be changed to:

Timer Set the self-timer to determine after how long you want the camera to click a photo after you press the shutter button. Burst Set the maximum number of photos that can be taken at a time. Changing Zoom Settings Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > Zoom. 1. 2. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. The Zoom settings can be changed to:

Zoom*1(default) Zoom*2 Zoom*3 Changing White Balance Settings Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > White Balance. 1. 2. 3. Make the necessary changes and press the Action button. Changing Camera Settings 39 The White Balance settings can be changed to:

Automatic (default) Night Sunlight Cloudy Fluorescent Incandescent NOTE: You can choose the preset depending on your shooting conditions. Configuring File Settings Use your HP iPAQ File Settings to resize pictures for e-mail and to optimize for slideshow viewing. Press Start > Camera, and then press Menu > Options to change one or more of following options:

1. General The general settings can be changed to:

Large (640*480) (default) Medium Small Original The orientation of picture can be changed to:

Left Right 2. Slide Show The Slide Show settings can be changed to:

Landscape Portrait Select the Play Screensaver when connected to my PC and idle for 2 minutes check box to make your computer screensaver your HP iPAQ screensaver. 3. Camera Save files to: Press the Action button and scroll to select the phone or storage card as the storage device. The default folder on the device is \My Documents\My Pictures. Type filename prefix: Enter the text you want to add at the beginning of the filename. NOTE: You can save the filename prefix with any alpha numeric character and certain symbols. Still image compression level: Press the Action button and scroll to select the required option. 40 Chapter 8 Camera NOTE: Higher-quality pictures look better, but are also larger in file size. Lower-quality pictures require less storage space and may take less time when sending by Multimedia Messaging Service

(MMS), or e-mail. Using the Camcorder Recording Videos You can use the built-in camcorder on your HP iPAQ to create short videos and share them with your friends and family. 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Camera. Press Menu > Video. Press the Action button to start recording. Press the Action button again to stop recording. Configuring Video Format Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos, and then press Menu > Options > Video. Select the Include audio when recording video files check box to record both audio and video. Set time limit to one of the following:

30 Seconds 15 Seconds No Limit NOTE: By default, all the pictures and videos are stored in \My Documents\My Pictures. Transfer Images Using GPRS Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on the HP iPAQ. To transfer pictures using MMS:

1. 2. 3. Navigate to highlight Insert Picture/Video area. 4. 5. Navigate to a required picture you want to add and press the Action button. 6. Press the Action button to open Pictures & Videos. Press Send. Using the Camcorder 41 Using Bluetooth You can do the following to transfer images from your HP iPAQ to other devices:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > More > Pictures & Videos. Scroll and select a picture. Press Menu > Beam. Select the device and press Beam. NOTE: You should have the Bluetooth connection on to transfer images. 42 Chapter 8 Camera 9 Messaging You can use your HP iPAQ to keep in touch with your family and friends through messaging. Use your HP iPAQ to keep you updated on your e-mail messages. You can also keep a track of appointments and meetings using your HP iPAQ. Understanding Messages To send and receive e-mail messages using your HP iPAQ, you can:

Send and receive e-mail messages using the Direct Push Technology for Exchange server. Send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account with an ISP. Send and receive e-mail messages for an e-mail account that you access using your VPN connection. You will need your account settings for VPN connection (typically a work account). You can also send pictures, video, and audio files on your phone and storage card using MMS. You can send only pictures, or a combination of pictures and videos, or audio files. Text can also be added to a MMS slide. Text messages can be sent using your HP iPAQ. Text messages are sent and received through your wireless service provider using the phone number as the message address. NOTE: MMS or Internet e-mail is sent and received by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) e-mail server. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to connect to your ISP. You can also use your HP iPAQ to connect by using a cellular line connection (for example, using MMS). Using Folders Each messaging account has its own set of folders with five default Messaging folders:

Deleted Items Drafts Inbox Outbox Sent Items The messages you send and receive through the account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each account. Understanding Messages 43 The way folders work vary by type:

1. ActiveSync: If you use an Outlook e-mail account, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are synchronized automatically with your HP iPAQ. You can choose to synchronize additional folders by designating them for synchronization. The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. You can read the messages while you are away from your computer. 2. MMS/Text Messages: If you use an MMS account or a text message account, messages are 3. 4. stored in the Inbox folder. POP3 account: If you use a POP3 account and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on your HP iPAQ and their copies on the e-mail server. When you connect, the e-mail server detects that the messages are missing from the Inbox folder on your HP iPAQ and deletes them from the e-mail server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except your HP iPAQ. IMAP4 account: If you use an IMAP4 account, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the e-mail server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to your e-mail server, whether it is from your HP iPAQ or computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your e-mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. You can also set different download options for each folder. Synchronizing E-mail When you synchronize Outlook e-mail on a computer with your device, e-mail messages are synchronized as follows:

Messages in the Inbox folder on your computer or Exchange Server are copied to the Inbox folder of the Outlook e-mail account on your device. Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Exchange Server or Outlook, and then sent from those programs. When you delete a message on your device, it gets deleted from your computer or Exchange Server the next time you synchronize. The default sync settings synchronize messages from the past three days only and the first 2 KB of each new message is downloaded. NOTE: Text messages are not received via synchronization. Instead, they are sent to your HP iPAQ via your service provider. Composing E-mail using Voice Commander You can use the Voice Commander feature on your HP iPAQ to select the recipient of your e-mail. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Email to (contact name) to Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. launch the e-mail compose form with the recipient added. You can now compose your message by speaking into the microphone. This audio file will be sent as an attachment. 3. 44 Chapter 9 Messaging To compose an audio e-mail:

1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Compose Audio E-mail to (contact Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. name) to start recording. 3. Record your message and press Stop. 4. Say Confirm if you want to send the message or say Retry/Cancel. Setting up Messaging Accounts Text Messaging Text messaging is the transmission of short text messages to and from a mobile phone, fax machine, and/or IP address. A single text message cannot be longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters or cannot contain pictures or graphics. Messages longer than 160 alpha-numeric characters are sent as multiple text messages. A character count is visible when text messages (New/Reply/Forward) are composed. The count also shows how many text messages are generated when the message is sent. The Text Message Service Center phone number is provided by your mobile phone service provider. Text messaging should function correctly after activating your account. MMS Messaging The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) is a method of transmitting photographs, video clips, sound files, and short text messages over wireless networks. When the phone radio is turned on for the first time, the GSM/GPRS Manager application detects the mobile phone service provider and automatically populates the MMS settings on your HP iPAQ. It is not recommended to change the MMS settings provided by your mobile phone service provider unless the change is requested. Setting up E-mail using Exchange Server 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Scroll and select the Exchange Server option from the Your e-mail Source box. Press Next. Press Next again to synchronize Outlook with your organization's Exchange e-mail server. In Server address, enter the Outlook Web Access server address. Enter the User name, Password, and Domain in the User Information tab. Select the check boxes of the data you want to synchronize, and then press Finish. Setting up E-mail using POP3 or IMAP4 account 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Messaging > New E-mail Account. Scroll and select the Other option from the Your e-mail Source box. Press Next. Scroll and select the Other (POP/IMAP) option from the Your e-mail provider box. Press Next. Setting up Messaging Accounts 45 4. 5. Enter your name and e-mail address and press Next. Press Done. Receiving E-mail Attachments An attachment sent with an e-mail message or downloaded from the server appears below the subject of the message. Navigate to select the already downloaded attachment or mark an attachment to download it the next time you send and receive e-mail. You can also download attachments automatically with your messages if you have an Outlook e-mail or IMAP4 e-mail account. If you have an Outlook e-mail account, do the following on ActiveSync dialog box:

1. Click Start > ActiveSync. 2. Click Options. 3. Click E-mail > Settings, and then select the Include File Attachments check box. NOTE: To open a recorded message received as an attachment, scroll to the recorded message and press the Action button. If you have an IMAP4 e-mail account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or an account that you access using a VPN server connection (typically a work account), do the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Messaging. Press Menu > Tools > Options. Select the name of the IMAP4 account. Press Next until you reach Server information, and press Options. Press Next twice, and select the check boxes Get full copy of messages and When getting full copy, get attachments. NOTE: Embedded pictures and objects cannot be received as attachments. An embedded message can be viewed as an attachment when using IMAP4 to receive e-mail. However, this feature does not work if Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) is enabled so that you can receive meeting requests. Receiving Meeting Requests If you receive your e-mail messages through ActiveSync, you can receive meeting requests. When connecting directly to an e-mail server, the server must be running Microsoft Exchange Server version 5.5 or later for you to receive meeting requests. If the server is running Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 or later, your meeting requests are automatically received in your Inbox. However, to receive meeting requests on Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, do the following:

Ask your system administrator to activate Rich Text Format (RTF) and TNEF support for your account. With TNEF enabled, your messages that are included in other messages as attachments are not received, and you cannot know if a message has an attachment until you get the full copy. In addition, download time may be longer. Change e-mail download options if your account is not set up to receive attachments. 46 Chapter 9 Messaging After you are set up to receive meeting requests, do the following:

1. 2. Press the Action button to open the meeting request you received. Press Accept. If you want, you can also include a message with the response. The response is sent the next time synchronize or connect to your e-mail server, and your device calendar is updated. Creating or Changing a Signature 1. 2. 3. Press Start > Outlook E-mail. Press Menu > Tools > Options. Press Signatures and scroll to select the account for which you want to create or change a signature. Select the Use signature with this account check box if it is not already selected. Select the Include when replying and forwarding check box, if required. Enter a signature in the box. 4. 5. 6. To stop using a signature, clear the Use signature with this account check box. TIP: You can use a different signature with each messaging account. Using Messaging Composing and Sending Messages Press Start > Messaging. Select the account you want to use. Press Menu > New and navigate to highlight the text area. Enter your text. Press Start > Messaging > MMS. Press Menu > New. Scroll and select the Insert Picture/Video area. Press the Action button and navigate to add the required image. Select a recipient, enter a subject and then press Send. To compose a text message:

1. 2. To send pictures/videos using MMS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To add preset or recorded audio (except when video already exists):

1. 2. 3. TIP:

time you connect. Scroll and select the Insert Audio area. Press the Action button to open the Audio folder and navigate to select a required audio clip. Press Select to attach the audio clip. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next Using Messaging 47 Replying or Forwarding a Message 1. 2. Press the Action button to open the selected message, and then press Menu > Reply, Reply All, or Menu > Forward. Enter your response. To quickly add common messages, press Menu > My Text and navigate to select a required message. Press Send. 3. NOTE: You can also use the voice commander to reply to any message. Use HP Voice Reply to reply using an audio e-mail message. Adding an Attachment to a Message In an opened message, press Menu > Insert. Select the item you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File. 1. 2. NOTE: Embedded objects cannot be attached to messages. Downloading Messages The manner in which you download messages depends on the type of account you have:

1. To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook e-mail account, begin synchronization through ActiveSync. Text messages are automatically received when your HP iPAQ is switched on. When your HP iPAQ is switched off (in flight mode), messages are held by your service provider until the next time your HP iPAQ is turned on. 2. TIP: By default, messages you send are not saved on your device to help conserve memory. If you want to keep copies of sent messages in your Outlook e-mail messaging list, press Menu > Tools >

Options > Message, and select the Keep copies of sent items in Sent folder check box. If your account is an IMAP4 account, press Menu > Folders and navigate to select the Sent Items folder check box. Press Sync to synchronize this folder. Downloading Messages from a Server 2. 1. On the message list, press Menu > Tools > Switch Accounts and select the account you want to use. Press Menu > Send/Receive. The messages on your device and e-mail server are synchronized:

new messages are downloaded to the device Inbox folder, messages in the device Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted from the server are removed from the device Inbox folder. Windows Live Messenger You can use MSN Messenger on your phone to send instant messages. MSN Messenger provides the same chat environment as of the MSN Messenger on your computer. With the MSN Messenger feature, you can:

Send and receive Instant Messages. Change your own status or view the status of others on your list. 48 Chapter 9 Messaging Invite others for a chat conversation. Block certain contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages. To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft.NET Passport account unless you already have a Hotmail account. To set up a Microsoft.NET Passport account, go to http://www.passport.net. After you have an account, you can use your HP iPAQ MSN Messenger feature. Signing In and Out of Messenger Press Sign In after navigating to a required sign-in status. Enter your information in the Sign-in and Password box. Press Sign In. Press Start > More > Messenger to open MSN Messenger feature. To sign into the Messenger:

1. 2. To sign out of the Messenger:

Press Menu > Sign Out to sign-out of MSN Messenger. If you do not sign out of MSN Messenger, you remain on a data connection, which may result in additional charges from your service provider. The session will not time out or end unless one of the following occurs:

User ends instant messenger session User "Accepts" an incoming voice call An outgoing voice call is placed The device is turned off or moves out of range Sending Instant Messages You can send Instant Messages from your MSN Messenger to contacts on your messenger list. To send Instant Messages:

1. 2. You can also manage your contacts and control their visibility. To manage contacts in the MSN Messenger:

Select the person to whom you want to send an Instant Message and press Send. Enter your message, and press Send. Press Menu > Add New Contacts to create a new contact. Press Menu > Contact Options > Delete to delete an existing contact. Press Menu > Block/Unblock to block or unblock the selected contact from seeing your status and sending you Instant Messages. NOTE: Press Menu > My Text to add common messages when composing instant messages. Press Menu > Invite to invite a contact to an ongoing chat. You can also see who is already talking to you or change between chats by pressing Menu > Chats. Windows Live Messenger 49 Changing Your Status You can change your status on MSN Messenger according to your need. To change your status:

1. 2. Press the Action button to select your name in the contact list. Press Menu > Change Appearances, and navigate to select the required status. 50 Chapter 9 Messaging 10 Calendar Keeping Track of Appointments You can keep a track of your appointments in various views:

1. 2. 3. NOTE: You can select the type of views you want from the Menu options. In Agenda View, you can keep track of appointments for the current date. In Week View, you can also keep track of appointments in a week. In Month View, you can also keep track of appointments in a month. Creating an Appointment To create an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > New Appointment. Enter your schedule for an appointment. Press Done. Updating an Appointment To update an appointment on your calendar:

1. 2. 3. Press Start > Calendar. Select and open the appointment, and then press Menu > Edit to make your changes. Press Done. Canceling an Appointment Press Start > Calendar. In Agenda View, select and open the appointment to delete. Press Menu > Delete. Press Yes to delete the appointment, or press No to keep it. When you delete an appointment in calendar on your HP iPAQ, it is also deleted on your computer the next time you synchronize. If the appointment has not been synchronized with a computer, it will be deleted only from your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. 3. 4. NOTE: Calendar items can be deleted only from Agenda View or from an open calendar appointment. To delete from Week and Month views, open the appointment, and press Menu > Delete. TIP: You can also press Start > Calendar, select the appointment to delete and press Menu > Delete Appointment. Keeping Track of Appointments 51 Changing the Display of the Work Week You can customize your calendar for a work week to start on Sunday or Monday. You can schedule your calendar for a five to seven-day week. To change the display of the work week:

1. 2. Press Start > Calendar. Press Menu > Tools > Options and do one or both of the following:

To specify the first day of the week, select Sunday or Monday in the First day of week box. To specify the number of days to appear in a work week, select 5-day week, 6-day week, or 7-day week in the Week View box. 3. Press Done. 52 Chapter 10 Calendar 11 Contacts Adding a Contact Press Start > Contacts. Press New to add a new contact. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact type. Enter the information. Press Done. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. TIP: Select Outlook Contact type to enter more information about contact. Deleting a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to delete. Press Menu > Delete Contact. Press Yes to delete the contact, or press No to keep it. Changing Contact Information You can include a nickname, job title, or any other information, for an existing contact. 1. 2. 3. 4. When finished, press Done. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit and make your changes. Copying a Contact Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact you want to copy. Press Menu > Copy Contact. Select the copy of the contact to make your changes. Press Menu > Edit. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Change the contact information as needed and press Done. NOTE: The displayed category is automatically assigned to the new contact. Adding a Contact 53 Adding a Photo To add a photo to contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the photo you want to add Select Camera and take a photo Press Done. 6. Sending an E-mail Message to a Contact Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select the address you want to send a message to and press E-mail. Select the account you want to send the message from. Enter your message and press Send. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: To quickly add a contact's address to a new message, select the To, Cc, or Bcc line, and press Menu > Add Recipient. Select the contact you want to send the message to and choose the address. Sending a Text Message to a Contact 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Contacts. Select and open the contact you want to send a message to. Select Send text message and press Text. Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, press Menu > My Text and select a desired message. Press Send. 5. If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and are sent the next time you connect. If you are sending a text message and want to know if it was received, before sending the message, press Menu > Message Options. Select the Request delivery notification check box and press Done. 54 Chapter 11 Contacts Adding and Removing a Picture To add a picture to the contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do one of the following:

Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Select Picture. Select the picture you want to add. Select Camera and take a picture. Press Done. 6. To remove a picture from the contact information:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press Start > Contacts. Select the contact. Press Menu > Edit. Press Menu > Remove Picture. Press Yes to remove the picture, or press No to keep it. Working with the Contact List There are several ways to use and customize the contact list. Here are a few tips on how to make it work for you. 1. 2. Press Start > Contacts. In the contact list, do any of the following:

To search for a contact by entering a name or number, or by using the alphabetical index, enter the name or number into the Name view. To see a list of contacts employed by a specific name or company, press Menu > View By > Name or Company. To see a summary of information about a contact, press the contact. From there, you can also make a call or send a message. To see a list of available actions for a contact, press and hold the contact. Adding and Removing a Picture 55 12 Applications Enjoy with your HP iPAQ by listening to your favorite MP3 music using Windows Media Player. You can also record voice clips to be sent as an attachment to family and friends. Use MS Office applications to view presentations, spreadsheets, and documents. Using HP Applications Using HP Voice Reply You can use HP Voice Reply to reply to your e-mail messages or compose a new e-mail. You can either do a reply to all, just reply to the sender, or forward a message. Use HP Voice Reply with your Outlook account as well as the POP3 and IMAP4 accounts from your HP iPAQ. You can access HP Voice Reply in three different views:

List View While reviewing a list of messages in the Inbox. Read View While reading a particular message from the list of messages in the Inbox. Compose View While composing a new e-mail message, replying to an e-mail message, or forwarding an e-mail message. To use HP Voice Reply:

1. When composing a new e-mail message or replying or forwarding a message, press Menu >

HP Voice Reply to select either of the following options:

Reply to Sender To send your reply only to the recipient who initially sent you the e-mail message. Reply to All To send your reply to all the recipients of the initial e-mail message. Forward To forward the initial e-mail message with your reply to any recipient. NOTE: The three submenu options: Reply to Sender, Reply to All, and Forward are available under the List and Read views. 2. Next, in the recording window, press Record to record your message. If you are in Compose view, press Menu > HP Voice Reply to go to the recording window NOTE:

directly. Press Stop when you finish recording your message. You can do one of the following after you finish recording:

Press Done to attach and send your recorded message. Press Menu > Play to review your recorded message. Press Done to attach and send the message. Press Menu > Record to re-record the message. Press Done to attach and send the message. Press Cancel to cancel the recording and exit the recording window. The recorded message is automatically attached to your e-mail. 3. 4. 56 Chapter 12 Applications 5. 6. Enter any short text message if required. You may also make changes to the editable fields in the e-mail. Press Send to send the message to the recipient. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant Use HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to simplify configuring settings on your HP iPAQ. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant lets you save the settings on your computer. This can help you restore configuration settings on your HP iPAQ at any time. HP iPAQ Setup Assistant also allows you to perform a factory reset on your HP iPAQ and view detailed product information. Using HP iPAQ Setup Assistant, you can manage multiple configurations and apply them quickly to your HP iPAQ. You can create a new configuration, modify existing settings, delete a selected configuration, or apply selected settings to your HP iPAQ. Select the following tabs to configure your settings:

Owner Information Enter your identification information and notes to describe you and your HP iPAQ. This is helpful if you lose your HP iPAQ. Wireless Network Wireless Network settings describe the configuration needed to connect to your work, home, or other wireless network. Proxy Proxy servers are located between two networks and are used to help prevent an attacker from invading a private network. You can enter proxy settings to specify the proxy configuration for your network. E-mail E-mail settings describe the configuration required to connect to and check your Internet e-mail accounts. Exchange Server Exchange Server is used to access e-mail, calendars, contacts, tasks, and other mailbox contents while on the go. You can set up Outlook on your HP iPAQ to synchronize directly with your organization's Exchange Server. VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) routes voice conversations using an IP-based network. VoIP to VoIP phone calls to any provider are typically free. SIP Proxy servers are used to implement call-routing policies and provide features to users. Speed Dial HP iPAQ Setup Assistant helps you to create and manage a list of speed dial numbers for your HP iPAQ. NOTE: The first speed dial entry is usually reserved for Voice mail by your phone service provider, and your service provider may also reserve an entry for emergency response. Browser Favorite Use your HP iPAQ Setup Assistant to create and manage a list of your favorite URLs. You can access these URLs using the Internet Explorer on your HP iPAQ. Finish In case of a new configuration, after you click Finish, enter a configuration name and an optional password and then click OK in the save configuration. If this is an existing configuration, the existing name and password will be used. Voice Commands Use voice commands to look up contacts, dial a contact by name, get calendar information, play and control your music, as well as launch applications on your HP iPAQ. Press the Voice Commander button to launch the voice commander application. Wait for the audio cue to say Say command, and then begin saying a command into the microphone. Using HP Applications 57 NOTE: You can also launch the voice commander by pressing the hookswitch on your HP iPAQ headset. To Say Call a contact saved in the contact list Call followed by the name or by speaking the 7 digit or 10 digit number without a pause Find a contact saved in the contact list Find followed by the name of the contact To call numbers not stored in the contact list Digit Dial followed by the digits in the number, Redial to redial the number, and Callback to call the last dialled number Important! The Digit Dial feature may not be available in all regions. To play, pause, and/or resume music Play Music/Pause/Resume To play an existing music file Play followed by the name of the music file To play the previous or the next song in the playlist Previous/Next To open an application View appointments Start followed by the application name

<Today's/Tomorrow's/This Week's appointments> to list the appointments for the day, next day, or the present week Read messages, e-mails, check call history Read<SMS/E-mail>/Call history View time What is the time?

View the different set of commands What can I say?

To close Voice Commander application Goodbye To compose an e-mail Compose Email To (Contact) To compose an audio e-mail Compose Audio E-mail to (Contact) to start recording an audio message To change profiles Set followed by the name of the profile to set the profile To dial a number using speed dial Speed Dial followed by the digit assigned to the number To record an audio note Start Recording to open the voice recorder and start recording To see all reminders To schedule a call Reminder Schedule A Call To (Contact) to call a contact HP iPAQ Shortcuts Using HP iPAQ Shortcuts Use HP iPAQ Shortcuts to access a list of shortcuts to your favorite applications or features on your HP iPAQ. You can edit the default shortcuts list or create new shortcuts and store them in the existing list. To use HP iPAQ Shortcuts:

1. 2. 3. From the Home screen, press Shortcuts. Scroll to the application you want to use. Press the Action button or Select to select the application. 58 Chapter 12 Applications Editing HP iPAQ Shortcuts You can change the default shortcuts and assign different applications. To edit a shortcut:

1. 2. Scroll to the shortcut you want to edit in HP iPAQ Shortcuts list and press Menu > Edit. To change the default shortcuts to different applications, scroll to Select new target and press the Action button. Select Tasks, Programs, Web Links, or File and press Select or the Action button. Select an application for which you want to create a shortcut. The selected application is shown on the Edit screen in the Shortcut name box. Press Save to save the application shortcut in the shortcut list. NOTE: To modify the name, specify a new name in the Shortcut name box and press Save to save the modified name. 3. 4. 5. Task Manager 1. 2. Press Start > Accessories > Task Manager. TIP: You can also press Start > Accessories > Resource Manager > Menu > Task Manager. From the Application list, select the program you want to close, and press Menu > Kill, or press Kill All to close all open programs. HP iPAQ DataConnect You can use the HP iPAQ DataConnect application to automatically configure your GPRS settings according to the service provider and the country in which your HP iPAQ is being used. To configure GPRS using HP iPAQ DataConnect:

1. 2. Press Start > More > Accessories > HP iPAQ DataConnect. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the process of setting up GPRS using your HP iPAQ DataConnect. HP iPAQ Tips Use HP iPAQ Tips to perform operations on your HP iPAQ in a quick and efficient manner. A tip is displayed on your screen every time you switch on your HP iPAQ. Press Next to display the next tip. To exit the application, press Menu > Exit. You can also access HP iPAQ Tips by pressing Start >

More > Accessories > HP iPAQ Tips. HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour is a fun way to learn more about your HP iPAQ. It provides basic information about the tasks and activities you can perform using your HP iPAQ. You can try each feature as you go through this tutorial. You can return to the same position in the QuickStart tour by simply selecting Start > More > HP iPAQ QuickStart Tour. Using Windows Media MP3 Player Press Start > More > Windows Media to open the windows media player. Using Windows Media MP3 Player 59 Using Windows Media 10 series, you can play media audio and video files, and MP3 audio files stored on your phone or memory card. It supports three different display screens:

Play (default) screen To display the Play screen, navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder and press the Action button. Now Playing screen To display the Now Playing screen, press Now Playing from the Play screen. Library screen To display the Library screen, press Menu > Library > My Device (HP iPAQ) or Memory. NOTE: Press Menu > Update Library to search for folders on your HP iPAQ or memory card and add the folders to the Library screen. To create a new playlist:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open File. 2. Navigate to the required media file, and press Menu > Queue Up to add the media file in the Now 3. 4. Playing screen. Press Menu > Now Playing to go to the Now Playing screen. Press Menu > Save Playlist to save the list of media files on the Now Playing screen. NOTE: Navigate the Library screen to select the playlist you want to delete, and then press Menu > Delete From Library. Enter the URL for streaming file, and press OK. To play a streaming media file on the web:

1. On the Library screen, press Menu > Open URL. 2. To play media files:

1. Navigate to a file you want to play or select a folder, and press the Action button. 2. On the Play screen, press Menu > Play/Pause to play or pause the media file. 3. Press Menu > Stop to stop the currently playing media file. NOTE: On the Play and Now Playing screen, press Menu > Shuffle/Repeat to play all the files in the playlist randomly or repeatedly. You can play your media files by using the voice commander application on your HP iPAQ. 1. 2. Hold your HP iPAQ 10 cm away from your face and say Play Music (Media File Name) to play Press the Voice Commander button on your HP iPAQ. the media file. NOTE: The Play Music voice command will only play media files present in a playlist. NOTE: Press the Voice Commander button and say Pause Resume Music to pause or resume the media file. Using Voice Recorder You can use the voice recording feature of your HP iPAQ to record voice clips, and use them as a voice note in your e-mails or MMS. 60 Chapter 12 Applications To record voice clips:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Voice Recorder. Press Record to start recording a voice clip. Press Menu > Play to play the recorded voice clip. To delete or rename the voice clip, press Menu > Rename/Delete. Press Menu > Set as Ringtone to set the voice clip as your HP iPAQ ringtone. Using MS Office Applications Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. Press Start > Office Mobile > Word Mobile. Press Start > More > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. To use MS Excel applications:

1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. 4. To use MS Word applications:

1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. 4. To use MS PowerPoint applications:

1. 2. Navigate to select the file, and then press the Action button to open the file. 3. 4. Press Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. Press Menu > Edit Mode to edit. Press Menu > Save As and enter the name. Select the location for the file and press Save. File Management Press Start > More > File Manager to explore the file manager. To view your files and folders, use:

Tree View: Displays the entire file structure in your phone memory. The functions in Tree View primarily focus on folder management. List View: Displays the selected folder and its sub-folders and files. The functions in List View are basically file-oriented. To delete a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be deleted, and press Menu > File > Delete. 2. Press Yes to delete. To copy/paste a file/folder:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file to be copied, and press Menu > File > Copy To. 2. Navigate the List view to select the destination folder, and press Menu > Paste to paste the file. Using MS Office Applications 61 To create shortcut:

1. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the file for which you want to create a shortcut, and press Menu > File > Create Shortcut. 2. Navigate the Tree or List view to select the destination folder to save the shortcut in and press Done. Playing Games Playing Bubble Breaker The objective of Bubble Breaker is to have balls (more than one) of the same color deleted from the screen. The fewer balls you leave behind, the higher your score will be. To start a new game:

Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. 1. Press Menu > New Game to open a new game of Bubble Breaker. 2. Press Menu > Statistics to select a style to display relative entries. 3. 4. To edit the settings for the game, press Menu > Options. NOTE: To recall the balls you deleted, press Menu > Undo. To play a game:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > More > Games > Bubble Breaker. Press Menu > New Game to open a new game of Bubble Breaker. Scroll and select a ball which is of the same color as the other balls around. Press the Action button twice to delete the balls from the screen. Playing Solitaire The objective of Solitaire is to use all the cards in the deck to build up four suit stacks in ascending order, beginning with the aces. You win the game when all cards are on the suit stacks. To play a game:

1. 2. Press Menu > More > Games > Solitaire. Press the number or character above the card stack displaying the card you want to move, and press the number or character above the card stack to which you want to move the card. 3. Move any aces on the seven stacks to the four card spaces at the top of the screen, and then make any other available plays. NOTE: Press the Navigation Key up to move a card to one of the four card stacks on the upper right corner of the screen if it belongs there. The card that is faced up on the four card stacks is always available for play. 4. When you have made all the available plays, press Draw to turn over cards. 62 Chapter 12 Applications Internet Explorer Press the Back key to go to the previous page. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile favorites. Use Internet Explorer Mobile to view and download web pages as well as browse Web sites through synchronization, or when connected to the Internet. The HP iPAQ DataConnect application detects the network settings and lets you connect to Internet Web sites. To open a link using favorite page:

1. 2. Navigate the favorite list and press Go to open the desired link. 3. To open a link using home page:

1. Press Start > Internet Explorer to open the Internet Explorer Mobile favorites. Press Menu >

Home Page to go the home page. Enter the link you want to connect to and press the Action button. Press the Back key to go to the previous page. Press Menu > Favorites to list all your favorite sites and press Menu > Add To Favorites to add a new URL in your favorites list. Press Menu > History to display the history. 5. NOTE: Press Menu > Options to change General, Connections, and Memory settings. 2. 3. 4. Internet Explorer 63 13 Storage Cards Using Storage Cards Use optional storage cards for:

Expanding the memory of your HP iPAQ Adding functionality NOTE: Storage cards must be purchased separately and are not included with your HP iPAQ. To locate information about storage cards, visit http://www.hp.com/accessories/ipaq. Inserting a Storage Card To insert a storage card into the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Locate the storage card slot on the side of your HP iPAQ. 2. Open the protective cover. 3. Insert the storage card into the storage card slot and push the connection edge of the card firmly into the storage card slot. NOTE:

If your storage card is not recognized, follow the card manufacturer's instructions to install it. If you have trouble inserting a storage card, try the following:

Make sure the label is facing down. Make sure you are not inserting the card at an angle. Make sure you insert the connection area (the metal area) first. Removing a Storage Card To remove a Micro Secure Digital (Micro-SD) storage card from the storage slot on the HP iPAQ:

1. Close all programs that are using the storage card. 2. Remove the card from the storage card slot by lightly pushing on the card to unlock it. 3. When the card disengages and pops out, pull it from the storage card slot. Viewing Content of a Storage Card Use File Explorer to view the files that are located on your optional storage card. 1. 2. Navigate to select the Memory Card folder to see a list of files and folders. Press Start > File Manager. 64 Chapter 13 Storage Cards If the HP iPAQ does not recognize your storage card, try the following:

Make sure you have firmly pushed the storage card into the storage slot. Make sure to install any drivers that came with the storage card. Viewing Content of a Storage Card 65 14 Synchronizing Copying (or Transferring) Files You can copy (transfer) files to and from your computer using Explore in ActiveSync and Windows Explorer. To copy (transfer) files:

1. Connect your HP iPAQ to your computer via the mini-USB synchronization cable. 2. On your computer, select Start > Programs > Microsoft ActiveSync. 3. 4. Double-click Mobile Device. 5. On your computer, right-click the Start menu, and select Explore. 6. Select Explore. Locate the file to be moved. NOTE: You cannot copy pre-installed files or system files. 7. Drag and drop your files between your HP iPAQ and your computer. ActiveSync converts the files so that they can be used by the Office Mobile programs, if necessary. Move your files directly into My Documents on your HP iPAQ (or into a folder inside My Documents), so the programs on your device can locate them. Migrating Data from Palm Desktop to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard If you used a Palm Operating System (OS) based device before purchasing your HP iPAQ, you need to migrate your data from the Palm Desktop software to Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard. To migrate data from Palm Desktop to Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard:

1. Make sure you have Microsoft Outlook 98 or a higher version installed on your computer. 2. Insert the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit into your computer's CD-ROM drive. From the Discover Your Handheld screen, select Install Microsoft Conduits. Alternatively, you may reinstall the Palm Desktop software. During the configuration process, select Synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook and Palm Desktop software. NOTE: Microsoft Outlook must be set as your default e-mail program to properly synchronize with the Palm Desktop software. If you need to change your settings, open Microsoft Outlook, then click Tools > Options > Other tab and check the Make Outlook the default program for E-mail, Contacts, and Calendar check box. Click Apply > OK, and then restart your computer. 3. Use the HotSync software located on the Companion CD that came with your Palm unit to synchronize your Palm information with Outlook. Refer to the instructions that came with your Palm unit for help installing or using HotSync. 66 Chapter 14 Synchronizing 4. When Outlook is synchronized with your Palm device, uninstall HotSync from your computer. Click 5. Start > Control Panel > double-click Add or Remove Programs. Select Palm Desktop, then click Remove. Follow the onscreen instructions. Insert the Getting Started CD into your computer's CD-ROM drive and follow the onscreen instructions to install ActiveSync on your computer and create a partnership between your HP iPAQ and your computer. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips How you manage the cost of synchronizing without wires from your HP iPAQ depends on your priorities. To Do this Reduce network connection or data transfer costs Extend battery life Keep your information up to date Increase the time between scheduled synchronizations, or synchronize manually. Check the details of your rate plan. Schedule synchronization less frequently or synchronize manually. During periods of high mail volume, schedule synchronization at regular but frequent intervals. During periods of low mail volume, schedule synchronization as items arrive. NOTE: The device power-down timer is reset each time you synchronize. If you schedule a synchronization interval that is smaller than the time interval set for the device to automatically power down, the device never turns off to save battery power. Wireless Synchronization Cost Saving Tips 67 15 Tasks Setting the Start and Due Dates for a Task 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Tasks. Select and open the task you want to set start and due dates for. NOTE: To create a new task, press Start > Tasks > Menu > New Task. Press Edit and do one or both of the following:

Select Start date to enter a start date for the task. Select Due date to enter a due date for the task. Press Done. Showing Start and Due Dates in the Task List 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Start > Tasks. Press Menu > Options. Select the Show start and due dates check box. Press Done. Marking a Task as Completed To mark a task as completed:

1. 2. Press Start > Tasks. In the task list, select the task you want to complete and press Complete to mark a check box as completed. To mark an open task as completed:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select and open the task you want to complete. Press Edit. In the Status box, select the Completed check box. Press Done. 68 Chapter 15 Tasks 16 Product Specifications System Specifications NOTE: Not all models described are available in all regions. For more information on specifications for your particular model, on your HP iPAQ, tap Start > Settings > System tab > AssetViewer. System Feature Processor Operating System Memory External Power Display LED Backlight Secure Digital (SD) Slot Wired Stereo Headset Antenna Audio Battery Bluetooth Wi-Fi Description TI OMAP 850 Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.0 Standard 128MB/64MB (NAND, ROM/RAM) 5 W maximum output AC adapter with detachable heads, voltage range 100 to 240 V switching, input current 0.2 A AC maximum, input frequency 50 to 60 Hz, output voltage 5 V DC, output current 1 A TFT Micro-reflective, 176x220 2.0", 65K Colors Multi-level brightness adjustment with power save mode Supports micro SD memory 3.5-mm jack with dual earbud style headsetIncluded in box Internal, Quad-Band antenna Speaker, and one 3.5-mm stereo headset jack 1,100 mAh Li-Ion removable/rechargeable battery Bluetooth 1.2, Profiles: Headset/ Hands-free/ OBEX/ PAN/

FTP/ Serial Port/ A2DP, 10 meter range (approximately 33 feet) High-speed, low-power, short-range wireless communication with other Bluetooth devices Wi-Fi 802.11b/g Physical Specifications Length Width Depth Weight US 4.65 in 2.8 in 0.71 in 5.8 oz Metric 107.0 mm 48.6 mm 16.3 mm 102 g System Specifications 69 Operating Environment Temperature Operating Non-operating Relative Humidity Operating Non-operating Maximum Altitude Operating Non-operating US 32 to 104F

-4 to 140F 85% RH 0%

0 15,000 ft 0 40,000 ft Metric 0 to 40C

-20 to 60C 85% RH 0%

0 4572 m 0 12192 m 70 Chapter 16 Product Specifications 17 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WLAN are transmitting simultaneously. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Federal Communications Commission Notice 71 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836) For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC 72 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Bblingen, Germany The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. European Union Notice 73 Products with 2.4-GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Battery Warning WARNING! This HP iPAQ contains a lithium ion rechargeable battery. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only with the HP spare. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Battery Recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, visit http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Battery Disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. 74 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices Equipment Warning WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to the equipment:

Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer. Do not place anything on the power cord or any of the other cables. Arrange them so that no one may accidentally step on or trip over them. Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by the plug or, in the case of the AC adapter, grasp the AC adapter and pull out from the electrical outlet. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your HP iPAQ. Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Medical Electronic Equipment If you have a medical condition that requires you to use a pacemaker, hearing aid, or any type of medical electronic equipment, consult the manufacturer of the equipment to determine if the medical equipment is shielded from RF energy. Turn off your HP iPAQ in health care facilities or hospitals when there are posted restrictions requiring you to do so. SAR Notice THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 1.15 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation other than the HP belt clip supplied with the product, it should not contain metal. Equipment Warning 75

* The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. Wireless Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Regulatory Wireless Notice WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. No metallic body accessories are allowed and 1.5 cm spacing between PDA and the body must be maintained to satisfy RF Exposure. This PDA has been tested and demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth, WLAN, and mobile phone are transmitting simultaneously. The highest FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the head is 1.35 W/kg and when tested for use at the body is 1.29 W/kg. This PDA must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Regulatory Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Singaporean Wireless Notice Switch off your cellular telephone when in an aircraft. The use of cellular telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the cellular network, and is illegal. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action or both. Users are advised not to use the equipment when at a refueling point. Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. The use of the Alert device to operate a vehicle's lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. 76 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices It is advised that a handheld microphone or telephone handset should not be used by the driver while the vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. Speak only into a fixed, neck slung or clipped-

on microphone when it would not distract your attention from the road. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. Japanese Notice Wireless LAN 802.11b Devices Wireless LAN 802.11g Devices Bluetooth Devices Japanese Notice 77 Taiwan DGT Notice Korean Notice Acoustics Warning WARNING! Listening to personal stereo equipment at full volume for long periods can damage your hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to hearing, one should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. HP recommends to use the headset delivered with your HP iPAQ (part number 430219, manufactured by Plantronics), that is in compliance to EN 50332-1. 78 Chapter 17 Regulatory Notices 18 Frequently Asked Questions I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

Your HP iPAQ appears to have problems with the battery. Please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charged?

Is the battery properly installed?

Are the contacts on the battery and phone clean? If the contacts appear to be soiled, contact your dealer to get them cleaned. I am unable to make or receive calls. How do I fix this?

If you have problems making or receiving calls, please perform the following checks:

Is the reception of the network signal good?

Is the network setup properly? If necessary, try to select your network manually. Have you activated the Fixed Dialing, Call Forwarding, and Call Barring functions? If yes, deactivate them temporarily. Are you using your HP iPAQ with other SIM cards with the Enable SIM PIN function activated? If yes, deactivate the function temporarily. Is your HP iPAQ switched to the Flight mode? If yes, turn it off. Are you currently located within closed boundaries? If yes, move to an open space or closer to a window. I have trouble connecting to the Internet. What should I do?

If you have trouble connecting to the Internet, please perform the following checks:

Make sure you have subscribed for a data service from your service operator. Make sure you entered correct setting parameters, such as APN and IP addresses in data profile setup. I am unable to hear voices clearly. How do I resolve this?

You may be unable to hear to voices clearly if you turn on the in-call mute function. Turn off this function to be able to listen to voices clearly. I cannot use certain call functions. What should I do?

To use certain advanced call functions, such as Call Forwarding and Call Barring, you may need to subscribe to these services from your service operator. I am having trouble turning on my HP iPAQ. What should I do?

79 Why do I hear disturbing noises during a phone call?

You may hear disturbing noises if you use your HP iPAQ near a microwave oven, speakers, or a television set. Avoid using your HP iPAQ near such items as it has an adverse effect on the voice quality. Why are the standby and talk time shorter at times?

Follow the guidelines given below to improve the standby and talk times on your HP iPAQ. The HP iPAQ may consume more power when the signal reception is poor. Try to move to an open location when you use your HP iPAQ. If you are using a new battery, it may take several charging and discharging cycles for the battery to reach its original capacity. Use the HP iPAQ after charging it completely. If your battery is very old, replace it with a new one. Avoid using the HP iPAQ in very high or low temperature environments. The efficiency of a battery can be effected by extreme temperature conditions. Why does the HP iPAQ operate slowly at times?

It is recommended to have at least 1.5 to 2 MB of free memory space on your HP iPAQ for the device to operate efficiently. To check the free memory space, press Start > Settings > More > About. Remember to delete or transfer old messages and pictures on your HP iPAQ to free available memory space. Why do I see the Home screen layout error message on my HP iPAQ display screen?

You will get a Home screen layout error message if you did not select a Home screen layout. To correct this, press Start > Settings > Home Screen and select a layout for the Home screen. I have trouble charging my battery. What should I do?

If you have trouble charging your battery, please perform the following checks:

Is the battery charger correctly plugged into the battery charger socket on the HP iPAQ?

Is the power cord of the charger damaged?

Is the battery very old? If yes, replace with a new battery and try again. I am unable to use the ActiveSync feature. What should I do?

To be able to use the ActiveSync feature, upgrade your computer to the latest version of ActiveSync. It is recommended to use ActiveSync 4.5 or a higher version. Visit http://www.microsoft.com/downloads for the latest versions. 80 Chapter 18 Frequently Asked Questions 19 Care and Maintenance It is recommended that you follow certain guidelines to prevent possible damage to your HP iPAQ and to keep it in a good condition. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ Avoid using your HP iPAQ in dusty and extremely high or low temperature environments. Do not spill water on your HP iPAQ or use it in the rain. Avoid removing the battery without turning off your HP iPAQ in advance. Do not apply strong force or shock to your HP iPAQ. Keep the HP iPAQ and its accessories away from children. Do not insert metal objects into the charging/communications port of your HP iPAQ. This can short-

circuit the battery and result in danger. Transfer your SMS messages from the HP iPAQ's memory to the SIM card memory. Guidelines for cleaning your HP iPAQ Use a soft, clean, and slightly moistened cloth to clean your HP iPAQ. Do not let water come into contact with the earpiece, microphone, or the metal surface. Do not wipe your HP iPAQ with any corrosive liquid or coarse objects. This can damage the outer surface of your HP iPAQ. Guidelines for carrying or storing your HP iPAQ Do not leave your HP iPAQ in extreme high or low temperature environments. Remove the battery from your HP iPAQ if it is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store the HP iPAQ and its battery in a cool, dark, and dry place. Guidelines for using accessories Use original HP batteries and chargers to charge your HP iPAQ. Do not use your HP iPAQ battery and charger for other purposes. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ in public places Turn off your HP iPAQ or switch it to silent mode when you are asked to in public places. Guidelines for using your HP iPAQ 81